HP EX485 MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Anúncio
Anúncio
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Table of Contents
Welcome to the HP MediaSmart Server 1
Chapter 1.
Set up and Installation 3
What You'll Need to Set up the Server............................................................ 4
Chapter 2.
Start Using Your Server 57
Chapter 3.
HP Photo Publisher 93
HP Photo Publisher Home Page ................................................................... 93
HP Photo Publisher Log on Page.................................................................. 94
Upload Photos or Create an Album............................................................... 97
Chapter 4.
HP Photo Viewer 107
HP MediaSmart Photo Viewer Home Page................................................. 107
Upload Photos or Create an Album............................................................. 113
HP MediaSmart Photo Viewer Album Missing Photos ................................ 115
Chapter 5.
Features for Mac 117
Installing and Uninstalling Software on the Mac.......................................... 117
Updating and Rolling Back Mac Clients ...................................................... 121
Connecting Your Mac to the Server ............................................................ 123
HP MediaSmart Server Control Center for Mac .......................................... 129
Chapter 6.
Online Backup 137
Server Online Backup Features .................................................................. 137
Before Using Server Online Backup............................................................ 137
Server Online Backup Dashboard ............................................................... 137
Windows Home Server Settings.................................................................. 143
Chapter 7.
About Streaming Media 147
Streaming Media Requirements .................................................................. 147
iii
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Putting Media on the HP MediaSmart Server ............................................. 147
Streaming to your Television, Stereo, and Home PC.................................. 147
Streaming to a Remote Computer............................................................... 148
Chapter 8.
Server for iTunes 149
Chapter 9.
TwonkyMedia 151
TwonkyMedia and Remote Streaming ........................................................ 155
Configure TwonkyMedia for Streaming Media ............................................ 155
Chapter 10.
Media Collector 157
Chapter 11.
HP Video Converter 177
Video Conversion Use Case Scenarios ...................................................... 178
Giving Users Access to the Converted Videos Folder ................................ 181
Enabling Converted Videos for TwonkyMedia ............................................ 182
Converting Non-Copy Protected DVDs ....................................................... 184
Chapter 12.
Media Streamer 189
Photos Page—Full Screen View ................................................................. 198
iv
Table of Contents
Chapter 13.
Troubleshooting & FAQs 205
Server Recovery and Factory Reset ........................................................... 226
Chapter 14.
Product Information 263
WM-DRM 10 Licensed Technology............................................................. 270
Limited Warranty and Technical Support Statement................................... 271
HP MediaSmart Server 2.5 Update Read me ............................................. 275
Chapter 15.
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source
Components 277
Software License Agreement (BSD License) .............................................. 277
Facebook Java API: The MIT License ........................................................ 277
Gdata Java Client: Apache License ............................................................ 278
JCIFS : GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE ............................... 281
ImageMagick: Compatible with GPL ........................................................... 292
TaskScheduler: The Code Project Open License (CPOL) 1.02................. 296
Facebook Development Platform Java Client ............................................. 300
Software License Agreement (BSD License) .............................................. 301
Glossary 317
Index 321
v
Welcome to the HP MediaSmart Server
The HP MediaSmart Server protects and shares a household's digital content—giving connected families an-easy-to-use, central repository for their digital photos, music, videos, and documents.
The HP MediaSmart Server supports computers running Microsoft® Windows® and Apple®
Mac® OS X, giving families that are "living the digital lifestyle" a more protected and reliable way of managing their media and files.
The HP MediaSmart Server Provides:
• Mac and Windows Supported Operating Systems
Support for households that have a mix of Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X 10.5 or later computers.
• HP Photo Viewer and HP Photo Publisher
A simple photo management and sharing tool that lets users share their photos directly from the
HP MediaSmart Server or through popular photo sharing web sites like Snapfish, Facebook,
Flickr™, and Picassa™ Web Albums.
Photo web site services are subject to change without notice and some services may not be available at the time of product purchase. The available service providers may vary in your country/region.
• Media Collector
Media Collector automatically collects photos, music, and video files from computers on the home network and organizes them on the server. Available on PCs only.
• Media Streaming and Remote Media Streaming
Photos, videos, and music can be streamed to PCs or TVs in the house. Furthermore, you can enjoy your photos, music, and videos—at home or at work—with remote media streaming to any
Internet-connected computer.
• PC Backup and Mac Backup
An automatic backup process for Windows PCs and Apple Macs on your home network.
Automatic backup of computers running Microsoft Windows® Vista (32 & 64 bit), XP Home
(SP2), XP Professional (SP2), Media Center Edition 2004 (SP2) or later, and Macs running Time
Machine.
• Remote Computer Access
Remote access to media and files with an easy-to-use, browser-based interface. With proper authorization, a remote user can log into their home system and perform functions as if they were sitting at their computer.
• iTunes Music Server
1
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Any computer system on the network that runs iTunes can access music on the HP MediaSmart
Server as an iTunes shared library.
• Disk Duplication and Storage Expansion
A way to transparently duplicate selected folders on separate disk drives to help protect against a hard disk failure. Plus, it's easy to add storage as needs grow.
Requires at least two hard disks.
2
Chapter 1.
Set up and Installation
W
HAT
'
S IN THE
B
OX
?
In the box you will find:
• HP MediaSmart Server
• Power cord
• Ethernet (RJ-45) cable
• Software and Documentation
T
HE
S
ERVER AT A
G
LANCE
The following lights and symbols are found on the front and back of the HP MediaSmart Server.
3
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
The Front of the Server
Light Bar. There is one light bar for each internal SATA disk in the HP
MediaSmart Server. The server can hold up to four disks.
Power Light. The power light is solid aqua white when the server is turned on.
Network Connection Light. The network connection light is solid aqua white when the server is connected to the network via a router or switch.
Health Light. The health light is solid aqua white when the server is operating correctly.
USB Port. Plug up to four USB 2.0 or later disk drives into the USB ports to expand your storage space. There is one USB port on the front and three on the back of the server.
The Back of the Server
USB Port. Plug up to four USB 2.0 or later disk drives into the USB ports to expand your storage space. There is one USB port on the front and three on the back of the server.
eSATA Port. Plug an eSATA (external SATA) hard drive into the eSATA port to expand your storage space.
Ethernet Port. Connect the HP MediaSmart Server to your network using an Ethernet cable.
Power Switch. Press to turn the HP MediaSmart Server on.
Power Port. Plug the included AC power cord into the HP MediaSmart
Server.
W
HAT
Y
OU
'
LL
N
EED TO
S
ET UP THE
S
ERVER
One or more open ports on a router connected to your network. The HP MediaSmart Server must be wired to the router. The network connection must support 100 Mbps to 1000 Mbps (Gigabit
Ethernet).
The router must have DHCP enabled to provide an automatic IP address to the server. See your router's documentation for additional information.
4
Set up and Installation
• One or more computers running Windows XP, Windows Media Center Edition, or Windows Vista for the first software installation. Optionally, an Apple Mac OS X 10.5 (Leopard) or later for additional software installations.
• An Internet browser is required to run the HP MediaSmart Server software. Choose one from the following options.
• Download Internet Explorer from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads .
• Download Firefox from http://www.firefoxdownload.com/ .
• Download Safari from http://www.apple.com/safari/download/ .
• A broadband connection, such as DSL or cable, is required for remote access functionality.
• iTunes 7.1 or later is required for combining household music libraries and streaming music with iTunes. Download iTunes from http://www.apple.com/itunes/download .
F
INDING A
H
OME FOR
Y
OUR
S
ERVER
Server Location
Find a suitable place to locate your HP MediaSmart Server before you install the software on your computers. The location you choose must have either an available wired network connection to your broadband router or a switch connected to your broadband router.
The server also requires adequate ventilation to ensure it does not get too hot:
• Do not locate the server in an unventilated space.
• Make sure that the server’s front and back panels are not blocked.
• Check that the location of the server is not too hot. Maximum environmental temperature for operating the server is 35 °C (95 °F).
Network Requirements
To successfully use the HP MediaSmart Server, your network must meet the following requirements:
Network Requirements
Requirement
Server connection
Home computers
Internet connection
Recommended
100 Mbps to 1000 Mbps (Gigabit Ethernet) wired connection
One or more computers running a supported operating system with a wired or wireless network connection. For a list of supported operating
systems, see Supported Operating Systems
.
Broadband connection, such as DSL or cable,
5
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Router
Requirement
Network Requirements
Recommended required for remote access functionality.
An external Internet broadband router with 100
Mbps (or faster) Ethernet connection to the server for remote access functionality and wired or wireless connections to the computers on the network.
Additionally, your router must have DHCP enabled to provide an automatic IP address to the server.
Supported Operating Systems
The following operating systems are supported to work with the HP MediaSmart Server:
Windows Vista
Windows Vista Home Basic
Supported Operating Systems
Windows XP
Windows XP Home with
Service Pack 2 (SP2)
Mac OS X
Mac OS X 10.5 or later
Windows Vista Home Basic
64-bit
Windows Vista Home
Premium
Windows Vista Home
Premium 64-bit
Windows XP Professional with SP2
Windows XP Home with SP3
Windows Vista Ultimate
Windows XP Professional with SP3
Windows XP Media Center
Edition 2005 with SP2 and
Rollup 2
Windows XP Media Center
Edition 2004 with SP2
Windows Vista Ultimate 64bit a. Remote access to network computers is not supported by Windows Vista Home (all versions); the Business, Enterprise, and Ultimate versions of Windows Vista support remote access. For more information, see Why can't I connect to some computers? in the Windows Home Server
Console Help. b. Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Media Center Editions support remote access.
Windows XP Home does not support remote access.
6
Set up and Installation
Wireless Support
You must connect the HP MediaSmart Server to your router (or switch) with an Ethernet cable.
The server does not support wireless connection to your router. However, computers connected wirelessly to a wireless access point or router are supported.
T
URNING ON THE
S
ERVER
Connecting the Server
How you connect the HP MediaSmart Server to your network depends on the network configuration.
This example shows a broadband router connecting the following:
• HP MediaSmart Server (Requires wired connection to a router, and remote features require a broadband Internet connection.)
• Desktop computer
• Laptop with a wireless adapter
TV connected to a network-enabled media streaming Media streaming sends media—music, photos and video files—from the HP MediaSmart Server to other devices that can play the media.
The HP MediaSmart Server includes functionality that allows media to stream to a Digital Media
Adapter (DMA).
7
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• Remote users connecting to the HP MediaSmart Server and home network through an Internet browser
The server requires a DHCP -enabled router to get its IP address . By default, most routers include a
DHCP server. For more information, check your router documentation.
Caution
If you have wireless functionality on your network, be sure to enable your router’s security settings, such as WPA or WEP , to protect your network. See the documentation that came with your router.
Connecting the Server
Connect the HP MediaSmart Server to a power source and to a router .
To power on the server
1. Plug in. Plug one end of the power cord into the server’s power receptacle and the other end into an electrical outlet.
2. Connect. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the server and the other end to an available
Ethernet port on your router or to a switch that is connected to your router.
3. Power on. Press the Power button on the back of the server.
The server takes approximately 60 seconds to start up. The indicator lights blink and change color throughout the startup process. Wait for all of the server lights to be pulsing before proceeding with the software installation.
Important
Do not attach USB devices to the HP MediaSmart Server during initial setup. For additional information, see Adding and Removing an External USB Drive, eSATA Drive.
8
Set up and Installation
Checking the Server Lights
The lights on the front of the HP MediaSmart Server indicate the status of the server. After the HP
MediaSmart Server startup completes but prior to the first software installation, the indicator lights show:
• Hard drives—breathing aqua white
• Power—breathing aqua white
• Network—breathing aqua white
• Health—breathing aqua white
After you complete the software installation, all lights should be solid aqua white.
I
NSTALLING THE
S
OFTWARE
Overview of the Software
Installation
Important
The first installation must be on a
Windows computer. Subsequent installations can be on a Windows or Mac home computer.
This section of the User's Guide provides detailed instructions for installing the HP
MediaSmart Server software. If you are familiar with installing software, it may not be necessary for you to read this entire section. However, HP recommends that you take a look at these important points.
Click a bullet to show or hide detailed information.
• Firewall and Anti-Virus Settings
Software firewalls installed on your computer can prevent the computer from locating the HP
MediaSmart Server on your network. Open your firewall and anti-virus software and make sure it
is set to "Learn" new programs. See, Updating Your Firewall's Trusted Program List
for more information.
• Administrator Privileges
You must have administrative privileges on the computer where you are installing the software.
Do the following to check for administrator privileges prior to running the software installation disc,
• On Windows Vista, click Start, Control Panel, and then User Accounts and Family
Safety.
9
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• On Windows XP, click Start, Control Panel, and then double-click User Accounts.
• On Mac OS X 10.5 or Later, click System Preferences, Accounts, and check Allow user to
administer this computer.
• Server Name
During the software installation, you will be asked to name the server. HP recommends that you keep the default name, HPSERVER. During the installation is the only time you can name your server. It cannot be changed later. Write down your server name.
• Server Password
You will also create a password for the server during the installation. Create a strong password. A strong password must be at least 7 characters long and must fulfill three of the following requirements:
• Uppercase characters
• Lowercase characters
• Numbers
• Symbols (such as !, @, and #)
• Client Update
At the time this documentation was written, the HP MediaSmart Server 2.5 update was available for download. If you are a new customer running the Software Installation Disc for the first time, the installation should find and install the 2.5 server software update. If the installation does not
find the update, you can install it from the Windows Home Server Console. See Updating and
Updates must be run on the server and the client to maintain compatible software versions.
Installing the update during installation or through the Windows Home Server Console only updates the server. To complete the process, you still need to update the client software. See
Updating and Rolling Back Client PCs
or Updating and Rolling Back Mac Clients
.
Updating Your Firewall's Trusted Program List
The HP MediaSmart Server Software Installation Disc installs several programs that enable your computer to communicate with the HP MediaSmart Server over your network. Software firewalls installed on your computer can block this communication and prevent the computer from locating the HP MediaSmart Server on your network.
Set Your Firewall or Anti-Virus Programs to Automatically
"Learn" New Programs
It is recommended that you set your firewall and anti-virus programs to "Learn" new programs before installing the HP MediaSmart Server software. After the HP MediaSmart Server software is installed, the firewall should prompt you to allow the installed programs to communicate with the server.
10
Set up and Installation
Allow the following HP MediaSmart Server programs to communicate through your firewall or anti-virus program:
1. C:\Program Files\Hewlett-Packard\HP MediaSmart Server
This directory will hold the following program that needs to be added:
• MediaManager.exe
2. C:\Program Files\Windows Home Server
This directory will hold the following program that needs to be added:
• MountBackup.exe
• RestoreOffProc.exe
• WHSTrayApp.exe
• WHSConsoleClient.exe
• WHSConnector.exe
Manually Add Programs to Your Firewall or Anti-Virus Programs
Trusted List
Some firewall or anti-virus programs may not automatically update their trusted programs list.
Instructions for manually updating several common firewall and anti-virus programs are listed below. If your firewall or anti-virus program is not listed, please contact the vendor to find out how to manually add programs to the trusted programs list. Additionally, see the documentation that came with your firewall or anti-virus program for the latest information.
Click the vendor to expand and view the instructions on updating their trusted programs list. Click again to hide the instructions.
• AVG
Open the AVG Anti-Virus plus Firewall. Double-click the Firewall button to configure the
Firewall. Add the programs listed at the top of this page.
11
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• McAfee
Open your McAfee Security Center, click Internet and Network, and then click the Advanced button in the firewall section. Click Program Permissions, then click Add Allowed Program.
Add the programs listed at the top of this page.
Note
McAfee's firewall automatically disables Windows Firewall and sets itself as your default firewall.
12
Set up and Installation
• Microsoft Windows Vista
To add exceptions to your firewall using Windows Vista, preform the following steps:
13
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
1. Click Start, Control Panel, and then Security Center.
14
2. Click Allow a program through Windows Firewall.
3. Select the Exceptions tab and then click Add Program.
Set up and Installation
4. In the Add a Program dialog box, click Browse. Add the programs listed at the top of this page.
5. Click OK.
• Microsoft Windows XP
To add exceptions to your firewall using Windows XP, preform the following steps:
15
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
1. Click Start, Control Panel, and then Security Center.
2. Click Windows Firewall.
16
3. Select the Exceptions tab and then click Add Program.
4. In the Add a Program dialog box, click Browse. Add the programs listed at the top of this page.
Set up and Installation
5. Click OK.
• Norton
Click Options in Norton to change the firewall settings. Add the programs listed at the top of this page.
17
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• Symantec
Open Symantec Endpoint Protection, Click Change Settings, and then click Configure Settings for Network Threat Protection. Add the programs listed at the top of this page.
• Trend Micro
1. Open the Trend Micro Main Console, select the Personal Network and Firewall
Controls tab, and then click Settings.
18
Set up and Installation
2. On the Personal Firewall page, click Add.
19
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
3. Select the Program Control tab and then click Add.
4. Click Browse and add the programs listed at the top of this page.
5. Click OK.
• ZoneAlarm
20
1. Open ZoneAlarm Security.
2. Click Program Control, Programs, and then Add.
Set up and Installation
3. Add the programs listed at the top of this page.
21
Installing Software on the First PC
This help topic provides detailed instructions for installing the HP MediaSmart Server software. If you are familiar with installing software, it may not be necessary for you to read this entire document. Instead, you may want to just look at the
Overview of the Software Installation
.
1. Check for Administrator Privileges
You must have administrative privileges on your home computer to install the software. Complete the following steps to view or change user account settings.
• On Windows Vista,
Click Start, Control Panel, and then User Accounts and Family Safety
• On Windows XP,
Click Start, Control Panel, and then double-click User Accounts
• On Mac OS X 10.5 or Later,
Click System Preferences, Accounts, and check Allow user to
administer this computer
22
Set up and Installation
2. Insert the Software Installation Disc
The Software Installation Disc first installs the HP MediaSmart Server software and then the Microsoft Home Server Connector software on your computer. o Insert the Software Installation Disc into a computer connected to your network. The installation starts. o Follow the instructions on each installation page.
Note
Computers running Windows Vista may display User Account Control messages, such as “A program needs your permission to Continue.” Click
Continue.
3. Find the Server
The installation looks for and connects to your HP MediaSmart Server.
Click Next once the server is found.
23
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
4. Download Software from the Server
Please wait while the installation downloads software from your server.
5. Welcome to the HP MediaSmart Server Software Installation
The HP MediaSmart Server software installs first. This software is used to
• Provide a single point of access for all of the server's features,
• Share photos and videos easily over the Internet using HP Photo Publisher and HP Photo Viewer
• Centralize your photo, video, and music libraries using HP Media Collector
24
Set up and Installation
6. Accept the License Agreement
Accept the end user license agreement and click Next.
7. Install the HP MediaSmart Server Software
Please wait while the HP MediaSmart Server software installs. This may take several minutes.
25
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
8. Welcome to the Windows Home Server Connector Software
Installation
The Windows Home Server Connector:
• Connects your computer to the server
• Automatically backs up your computer every night
• Monitors the health of the network and computers running Windows Vista
• Enables configuration of the server from your computer
The Windows Home Server software installation runs only once—on the first computer where you run the Software Installation Disc.
9. Install the Windows Home Server Connector Software
Please wait while the Windows Home Server Connector software installs.
This may take several minutes.
26
Set up and Installation
10. Automatically Download and Install Windows Home Server
Connector Updates
HP recommends that you select to automatically download and install updates.
11. Wake up this Computer to Perform Scheduled Backups
Select to wake up this computer if it is in sleep or hibernate mode to run a scheduled backup.
27
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
12. Customize your Home Server
Click Next to begin customizing your home server.
13. Start Windows Home Server
Click Welcome to initialize the Windows Home Server and configure basic options.
28
Set up and Installation
14. Initialize Windows Home Server
The Windows Home Server initialization begins and can take several hours depending on your hardware. Please wait while Windows Home Server:
• Configures your hardware
• Recovers your data
• Starts Windows Home Server
15. Name the HP MediaSmart Server
Type a name for your server. Server names can be:
• 15 characters maximum with no spaces
• Letters (at least one), numbers and hyphens
Important
This is the only time you can name your server. It cannot be changed later.
Write down your server name. The default name is HPSERVER.
29
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
16. Set the Server Password
Create a strong password . A strong password must be at least 7 characters long and must fulfill three of the following requirements:
• Uppercase characters
• Lowercase characters
• Numbers
• Symbols (such as !, @, and #)
Note
The password hint can be seen by anyone who clicks the Password hint button on the Windows Home Server Connector logon window.
Important
The server password is not the same as a user password. User accounts and passwords are setup in the Windows Home Server Console.
30
Set up and Installation
17. Help Protect Windows Home Server Automatically
Windows Home Server automatically downloads and installs relevant important updates from Windows Update to help make your home server more secure.
Choose if you want Windows Home Server to continue to automatically downloading updates after the software installation.
Note
It is recommended that you turn on Automatic Windows Updates.
18. Join the Customer Experience Improvement Program
Join the Customer Experience Improvement Program (CEIP) and help make Windows Home Server even better. CEIP collects information about your hardware and home server usage without interrupting you. None of the information that is collected is used to identify or contact you.
Choose if you want to participate in this program and click the next arrow.
31
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
19. Select Windows Error Reporting
To help understand the problems you may encounter with Windows Home
Server, Windows Error Reporting automatically reports errors to Microsoft.
Any personal information inadvertently collected in the reports will not be used.
Choose if you want to participate in this program and click the next arrow.
20. Check for Windows Home Server Updates
The Windows Home Server installation checks for any relevant important updates. This may take some time to complete, but does not require additional information from you.
Important
Do not restart or turn off your home server during the update process.
32
Set up and Installation
21. Install Updates on your Home Server
Please wait while Windows Home Server updates install. This may take several minutes.
22. Log on to Windows Home Server
Type the password you created earlier in the installation.
33
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
23. Check for HP MediaSmart Server Updates
The HP MediaSmart Server installation checks for any updates. Installing updates ensures that you experience the full functionality and optimal performance of the HP MediaSmart Server.
Note
This check only occurs the first time you run the Software Installation Disc.
If you want to check for updates at a later time, see Updating and Rolling
.
24. Connect to HP MediaSmart Server Web
Please wait while HP Update connects to the Web and looks for updates for the HP MediaSmart Server.
34
Set up and Installation
25. Install Server Updates
Select the update and complete the instructions on the screen to install it.
At the time this document was written, the 2.5 update was available for download. If you are a new customer running the Software Installation
Disc for the first time, the installation may find and install the 2.5 server software update depending on options you selected earlier in the install. If the installation does not find the update, you can install it from the
Windows Home Server Console after the installation completes. See
Updating and Rolling Back the Server .
Important
Do not restart or turn off your home server during the update process.
26. The Windows Home Server Console opens
The Windows Home Server console opens. Use the console to set up user accounts and configure HP MediaSmart Server features. Click Help in the upper right corner of the Console to get additional assistance.
35
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
27. Update the Client Software
Updating the server and the client are separate processes. If you chose to update the server software in Step 25 or by running HP Update in the
Windows Home Server Console, you must also update the client software.
Updates must be run on the server and the client to maintain compatible software versions.
To complete the process and update the client software, see
or Updating and Rolling Back Mac Clients
.
36
Updating Client PCs
Note
Update the server software prior to updating the client software. If your server does not have the correct software version, you will get an error message when you try to install the client software.
See Updating and Rolling Back the Server for more information.
After installing the server update, you are ready to update the client software on each PC in your
home that accesses the server. For Mac instructions, see Updating and Rolling Back a Mac Client .
1. At the computer, click Start, and then Run.
Type or copy/paste the following ( UNC ) network address into the Run dialog.
\\HPSERVER\Software\Home Server Connector Software\setup.exe
If you renamed your server during the initial software installation, the path will be \\<server name>\Software\Home Server Connector Software\setup.exe.
2. Follow the instructions on your computer for installing the update.
There are other methods for installing the update. For more details, see
.
Installing Software on Additional PCs
You can install the server through a
web browser or you can use the Software Installation Disc to
install the HP MediaSmart Server and Windows Home Server Connector software on the other computers on the home network. Install the software on one computer at time.
If you misplaced or damaged your Software Installation Disc, you can also install the software for your computer directly from the server. For more information, see
To install from the server using
.
To install from the Software Installation Disc
1. Insert the Software Installation Disc into a computer connected to the home network.
You must have administrative privileges to install. For additional information, see Installing the
Software on the First Computer.
37
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
2. Follow the instructions on the installation wizards.
The installation process is identical to installing on the first computer except for the following:
• The Windows Home Server Setup does not run.
• Your server password is required to install, as shown in the following figure:
To install the from the server using Windows XP or Windows
Vista
Note
If you are installing on a Windows Vista 64-bit operating system, you must have Windows Home
Server with Power Pack 1 installed. To check your version of Windows Home Server, doubleclick the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray. Click Settings, and then click
Resources in the sidebar of the Windows Home Server Settings dialog box.
1. At the computer, click Start, and then Run.
Type the following ( UNC ) network address:
\\HPSERVER\Software\Home Server Connector Software\setup.exe
The network address will be different if you renamed your server. In this case type,
\\<server name>\Software\Home Server Connector Software\setup.exe
2. Click OK.
Setting up Additional Computers
After installing the software on the Software Installation Disc, there are a few setup options for you to consider.
• The home computer is automatically set up to be backed up each night. If you want to customize
back up settings for this computer, see Computer Backups .
• If you created individual user accounts in Windows Home Server for one or more family members that use this computer, you also need to set up computer user accounts for them if you want them
38
Set up and Installation to be able to access features on the server without logging on. For additional information, see User
Accounts in the Windows Home Server help.
• If there is an iTunes library on this computer that you want to include in an aggregated iTunes library on the server, set up this computer to copy its iTunes library to the server. For additional
information, see Set up iTunes .
Installing and Uninstalling Software on the Mac
•
•
To Install the Mac Software
The Server has to be configured first using a Windows Client. Once the Windows Home Server
Connector has been installed you can install the Features for the Mac.
Note
You must have administrative privileges on your computer to install the software. Click System
Preferences, Accounts, and check Allow user to administer this computer.
1. Once Windows Home Server has been installed on a Windows home computer, insert the installation CD and a screen will appear with 2 icons, one for install and one for uninstall.
2. Double click the Install HP MediaSmart Server Software.pkg to begin the install process.
3. On the Welcome to the HP MediaSmart Server Software click Continue to install.
39
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
4. The End User license Agreement will pop up, click Continue to agree.
5. A standard install screen will appear, this screen will report how much room is available for the install on the default location. You do have a button to press to change location if you desire.
Otherwise click Install.
6. Once the install is completed a confirmation screen will appear followed by a settings or a preferences screen.
40
Set up and Installation
7. The confirmation screen can be closed or left open. It will not effect the rest of this process. Click
Close, to close the summary screen.
8. On the settings screen you will need to enter the server name and the server’s administrator
password so that the Mac software can access your Server. The authentication process begins when you stop typing the password.
9. Once your credentials have been authenticated, click Apply to save the server name and password.
Note
Server Name and Password have to be authenticated prior to using the control center, or entering preferences for BackUp.
10. After clicking Apply, you can click BackUp to set your BackUp Preferences. Or you can click
Show All to go to the Control Center.
41
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
To Uninstall the Mac Software
After the Mac software has been installed, should you decide to un-install the Mac software, insert the Software Installation Disc and a screen opens with two icons, one for install and one for uninstall.
1. Double click the Uninstall HP MediaSmart Server Software to begin the process.
2. Follow the on screen instructions to complete the uninstall process, click Continue, and then click
Close on the Summary screen.
HP MediaSmart Server 2.5 Update Read me
As always, the HP MediaSmart Server helps you centralize, organize, and share your digital content. The 2.5 update improves on existing HP MediaSmart Server features, making them even more robust. Additionally, new features were added to make your music, photos, and videos more mobile than ever before. With the HP MediaSmart Server, your media is where you are…wherever you are. Read on to discover what's new!
HP Video Converter
The HP MediaSmart Server automatically converts your video library (including unprotected
DVDs) into a format that will play in the home and remotely on PCs, Macs, XBox 360s,
PlayStation 3s, and other popular media streaming devices. The video converter transcodes many popular video formats into an MPEG-4 video file using an H.264 video codec and AAC stereo audio codec with both original and mobile resolutions. The original video resolution streams to most devices attached to your home network including PCs, Macs, and gaming systems. The mobile video resolution streams remotely to your PC or Mac using a secure remote log on to your server and can be copied to popular mobile devices.
42
Set up and Installation
HP Media Streamer for Videos
The HP Media Streamer always supported music and photos. Now it supports videos!
Whether you are at home, on campus, at work, or visiting friends and family, you can use a web browser and your HP MediaSmart Server personal web address to securely log on to your server and use Media Streamer to stream music, photos, and videos to wherever you are. No additional player is required. Media Streamer does it all—it streams your media and offers several playback options.
MediaSmart Server iPhone Application
The MediaSmart Server iPhone application is a free download that allows you to securely stream photo, music, and video libraries from your home server to your iPhone or iPod Touch. And since your MediaSmart Server is designed to stay on 24/7, all of your media files are now just a fingertip away. Wireless or 3G connection is recommended for best performance. The iPhone application is only supported on EX 487 and EX 485 HP MediaSmart Servers.
Defect Fixes and Enhancements
The following defect fixes and enhancements are included in this update.
1. Public and private capabilities were added to HP Photo Viewer albums.
2. Made a number of improvements to the Mac Backup feature, including the ability to resize the backup disk.
3. Fixed a number of TwonkyMedia server issues, including the case where songs would not play all the way through.
4. Improved the HP Media Streamer interface, including adding support for streaming video files,
column sort functionality, and new album art views. See HP_Media_Streamer_for_Videos above.
5. Added streaming support for iPhone. See MediaSmart_Server_iPhone_Application above.
6. Added the HP Video Converter which transcodes common video formats to an H.264 video codec and AAC stereo audio code. See
7. Improved Media Collector by displaying progress details, status information, and client connectivity to shared folders.
8. Improved The HP MediaSmart Server dashboard functionality.
9. The User's Guide was updated to match HP MediaSmart Server software changes.
HP S
OFTWARE
U
PDATES
HP MediaSmart Server Software Update
Use the HP MediaSmart software update to keep your server and home computers current with the latest HP software, online help, and new features.
43
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
HP MediaSmart software update does not update the Microsoft Windows Home Server operating system. For information about updating Windows Home Server, see Configuring Windows
Update in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
To Configure HP MediaSmart Software Update
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. Click Settings in the upper right of the Console.
3. Select HP MediaSmart Server in the left menu and click the HP Update tab.
4. In the Configure section you have choices to
Configure HP Software Update Options
Option
Automatically download and install updates
(recommended)
Additional information
Requires no user action.
Downloads and installs updates on the server in the background. If necessary the server will automatically reboot.
Download updates and let me choose when to install
Requires user action.
Your computer notifies you that an update has been downloaded and is ready to install on the
44
Set up and Installation
Option
Configure HP Software Update Options
Turn off automatic updates
Additional information server. Additionally, the Install link turns blue under HP MediaSmart software updates.
To update the server after an update is downloaded, click Install under HP MediaSmart software updates in the Windows Home Server
Console
Not recommended.
To get updates with this choice you will have to click Check for updates located in the Version section.
5. The following information and options are in the Version section of the HP Update dialog
• The server software version number and date are shown.
• Click Check for updates to immediately check for available software updates, regardless of the configuration settings you selected above.
• The Install link becomes active when an update has been downloaded, but not installed.
Click Install to run the server update.
• The Rollback link becomes active when a software update has been installed. Use this link to uninstall the update on the server and revert to the previous server software version.
Important
Clicking Install or Rollback only makes changes to the server software. Each home computer still needs to be updated or rolled back so that the server and client computers are running the
same version of software. See Updating and Rolling Back Client PCs
Back Mac Clients for more information.
Updating and Rolling Back the Server
Use the HP MediaSmart software update to keep your server and home computers current with the latest HP software, online help, and new features.
Important
The server must be updated before client PCs and Macs are updated. The server and the client computers must be running the same version of the HP MediaSmart Server software.
To update the server
The method you use to update the server depends on how you configured HP Update.
• To automatically check for updates
45
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
If you selected Automatically download and install updates when you configured HP Update, then you do not need to take further action. The server will install updates in the background as they are available.
• To manually check for updates
Note
If you have never restarted you HP MediaSmart Server, you may need to turn it off and back on before you check for updates.
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. Click Settings in the upper right of the Console.
3. Select HP MediaSmart Server in the left menu and click the HP Update tab.
4. Click the Check for updates link.
46
5. If an update is found it will be listed as below. Click Next to start the install process; follow default choices to complete the software install.
Set up and Installation
• To manually install an update copied to the server
1. If you downloaded a software update from the www.hp.com site, you can manually install it by copying the software update package to your server. Once the update is on the server, complete the following steps.
2. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
3. Click Settings in the upper right of the Console.
4. Select HP MediaSmart Server in the left menu andclick the HP Update tab.
5. Click the Check for updates link. After the install wizard checks for pending updates on your server, you will see the select package page where you can select the Search button.
47
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
6. Click Select file.
7. Type the full path to the file that you copied to the server or select the Browse button navigate to the file and select OK.
48
8. Click Finish to start the install process and follow the default choices to complete the server software install.
Set up and Installation
To roll back the server
If you want to uninstall a server update click Rollback and then click Yes in the confirmation screen. If you updated the client software, it must also be uninstalled so that the server and the client are running the same version of the HP MediaSmart Server software.
Note
HP MediaSmart software update does not update the Microsoft Windows Home Server operating system. For information about updating Windows Home Server, see Configuring Windows
Update in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
Updating and Rolling Back Client PCs
Note
Update the server software prior to updating the client software. If your server does not have the correct software version, you will get an error message when you try to install the client software.
See Updating and Rolling Back the Server for more information.
Updating Client PCs
There are multiple ways of updating your client PCs. Once the server is updated, the client PC update is on the server and can be run from the software folder. The client PC update can also be
49
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide downloaded and run from HP Update. The following sections describe various methods for installing the client PC update. Click an option to expand and view the instructions for updating your client. Click again to hide the instructions.
• To Update Client PCs Using Run Programs
1. At the computer, click Start, and then Run.
Type the following ( UNC ) network address.
\\HPSERVER\Software\Home Server Connector Software\setup.exe
If you renamed your server during the initial software installation the path will be \\<server name>\Software\Home Server Connector Software\setup.exe.
2. Follow the instructions on your computer for installing the update.
• To Update Client PCs Using HP Update
1. Click the Start menu, HP, and HP Update.
50
2. Click Settings to configure HP Update.
Set up and Installation
3. Click Next to immediately check for a client PC update.
4. Follow the instructions on your computer for installing the update.
• To Update Client PCs Using the Software Installation Disc
The Software Installation Disc runs an executable file that is on your server. When the server software is updated, the new client executable file is placed on the server but not installed. As long as you run the Software Installation Disc after you update the server, the CD will find the new client executable file on the server and install it.
• To Update Client PCs Using a Browser
1. Open a Web Browser and type the following address http://hpserver:55000.
If you renamed your server during the initial installation the URL will be http://<server name>:55000.
The Windows Home Server Connector Setup window opens.
2. Click Download Now.
Rolling Back Client PCs
Important
.
1. Click the Start menu, Control Panel, and Add or Remove Programs.
2. Select HP MediaSmart Server and click Remove.
3. Select Windows Home Server Connector and click Remove.
4. Close Add or Remove Programs.
5. At the computer, click Start, and then Run.
6. Type the following (UNC) network address.
\\HPSERVER\Software\Home Server Connector Software\setup.exe
The network address will be different if you renamed your server. In this case type,
\\<server name>\Software\Home Server Connector Software\setup.exe
7. Click OK.
Install the software on one computer at a time.
Checking the Client PC Version Number
It is important for the Server software and the Mac client software to be on the same version in order for them to work together properly. Complete the following steps to confirm that the server and the client are on the same version.
1. To check the PC client software version number, click the Start menu and click HP MediaSmart
Server.
2. In the task bar at the bottom of your screen, right-click HP MediaSmart Server and select About
HP Control Center from the pop-up menu.
51
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
The About dialog opens.
3. To check the server software version number, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
4. Click Settings in the upper right of the Console.
5. Select HP MediaSmart Server in the left menu and click the HP Update tab.
The version number is at the bottom of the HP Update tab.
52
Set up and Installation
The server and client software should have compatible version numbers. The following table lists the version numbers that work together.
Compatible Software Version Numbers
Server Version PC Client Version Mac Client Version
1.3.6.21622 1.2.1.18999, N/A
1.3.8.25155 1.2.1.18999, 1.3.6.21622,
1.3.8.25155
N/A
2.1.7.24261 2.1.7.24261 1.0.0b20
2.5 2.5 2.5
Updating and Rolling Back Mac Clients
Updating Mac Clients
Important
Update the server software prior to updating the client software. The server update and the Mac client update are downloaded at the same time through the HP Update mechanism in the Windows
Home Server Console. Updating the server ensures that the most recent copy of the HP MSS
53
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Client.dmg is on your server and ready to install. See Updating and Rolling Back the Server for
more information.
1. Insert the Software Installation Disc and run it, or
Select the server name in the left side of the Finder and connect to the server.
The name of the server is HPSERVER, unless you renamed it during the original installation.
Choose Software > Mac, and then run HP MSS Client.dmg.
2. When the software window opens, click Uninstall HP MediaSmart Server Software.
Moving the application to the trash can will not uninstall it properly.
3. After the uninstall is complete, click Install HP MediaSmart Server Software.pkg to install the update.
Rolling Back Mac Clients
Important
Roll back the server software prior to rolling back the Mac client software. When the server is rolled back using the HP Update mechanism in the Windows Home Server Console, it also rolls back the HP MSS Client.dmg file that is located on the server. See
for more information.
1. Go to Finder > Applications, and then drag and drop HP MediaSmart Server Control Center to the Trash.
2. Select the server name in the left side of the Finder and connect to the server.
The name of the server is HPSERVER, unless you renamed it during the original installation.
3. Choose Software > Mac, and then run HP MSS Client.dmg.
54
Set up and Installation
4. When the software window opens, click Install HP MediaSmart Server Software.pkg to install the update.
Checking the Mac Client Version Number
It is important for the Server software and the Mac client software to be on the same version in order for them to work together properly. Complete the following steps to confirm that the server and the client are on the same version.
1. To check the Mac client software version number, go to Finder > Applications, and open the HP
MediaSmart Control Center on the Mac.
2. At the top of the screen select HP MediaSmart Server Control Center > About HP
MediaSmart Control Center.
The Mac client version number is displayed in the About dialog.
3. To check the server software version number go to a PC and double-click the Windows Home
Server icon in the system tray and log on.
4. Click Settings in the upper right of the Console.
5. Select HP MediaSmart Server in the left menu and click the HP Update tab.
The version number is at the bottom of the HP Update tab.
Note
Server version 2.1.7.24261 and Mac client version 1.0.0b20 work together. Starting with version
2.5, the server and the client version numbers will have the same first two numbers.
55
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
The server and client software should have compatible version numbers. The following table lists the version numbers that work together.
Compatible Software Version Numbers
Server Version PC Client Version Mac Client Version
1.3.6.21622 1.2.1.18999, N/A
1.3.8.25155 1.2.1.18999, 1.3.6.21622,
1.3.8.25155
N/A
2.1.7.24261 2.1.7.24261 1.0.0b20
2.5 2.5 2.5
56
Chapter 2.
Start Using Your Server
G
UIDED
T
OUR
HP MediaSmart Server Control Center for PC
The Control Center is the starting point for accessing the features of the HP MediaSmart Server.
The Control Center has three sections:
Browse—Access your shared folders .
• Tools—Tools and settings for configuring your server.
• Help & Support—Learn to use the HP MediaSmart Server and connect to online support.
Opening the Control Center on a PC
The Control Center can be accessed from the following:
Windows Start menu—at the computer, click Start, All Programs, and then select HP MediaSmart Server.
Desktop icon—at the computer, double-click the HP MediaSmart Server icon on the desktop.
57
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
About the HP MediaSmart Server Control Center for PC
The Browse Section
Shared folders are places to help you get started saving and organizing your files so that you can share them with other people on your network.
Server—opens a folder that displays a list of all your shared folders.
Photos—opens a folder that displays a list of photos and photo subfolders.
Music—opens a folder that displays a list of music and music subfolders.
Video—opens a folder that displays a list of videos and video subfolders.
If the logon name for the user account on your server does not match the logon name for your computer, you must enter a user name and password. For information about creating matching user accounts, see Why should logons names match? in the Windows Home Server Console
Help.
58
Start Using Your Server
The Tools Section
Use the tools and settings on this tab to configure your HP MediaSmart Server.
HP Photo Publisher—Publish photos from your Server to your favorite photosharing site. Friends and family can see your photos on the Internet.
Home Server Console—opens the Windows Home Server Console, where you manage and configure the server. For more information, see Windows Home
Server Console in the Windwows Home Server Console help.
Backup now—immediately backs up your computer. All files not backed up since the last nightly backup are backed up. For more information, see Backup
Now in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
Media Streamer—opens a web application for streaming music, videos, and photos in your home. For more information, see
.
Media Collector Status—opens a client tool for viewing media collection
information and connectivity. For more information, see About Media
Wake Server—Click Wakeup Server if you want to use the HP MediaSmart
Server during sleep hours. All of the lights on the Server will be off when it is
in sleep mode. For more information, see Power .
The Help & Support Section
Get information about using, configuring, and getting accessories for your HP MediaSmart Server.
User’s Guide—contains installation information, setup instructions, how to use the server, tutorials, and other important information.
Online support—go to the HP Support web site, where you can get more information about the HP MediaSmart Server.
Registration—Click to go to https://register.hp.com
and register your HP
MediaSmart Server. Registering your Server ensures that your information is on file with HP if you should need technical support services.
Need accessories?—get accessories for your server and shop HP Home &
Home Office.
HP MediaSmart Server Control Center for Mac
The Control Center is the starting point for accessing the features of the HP MediaSmart Server.
The Control Center has three sections:
Browse—Access your shared folders .
• Tools—Tools and settings for configuring your server.
• Help & Support—Learn to use the HP MediaSmart Server and connect to online support.
59
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Opening the Control Center for Mac
The Control Center can be accessed from the following:
Using the Finder—at the computer, click Finder, Applications, and then select HP MediaSmart Server Control Center.
On the Dock—at the computer, double-click the HP MediaSmart Server icon on the Dock.
Desktop icon—at the computer, double-click the HP MediaSmart Server
Control Center icon on the desktop.
The Control Center desktop icon and system tray icon are available only if you selected to create them during installation.
About the HP MediaSmart Server Control Center for Mac
The Browse Section
Shared folders are places to help you get started saving and organizing your files so that you can share them with other people on your network.
Server—opens a folder that displays a list of all your shared folders.
Photos—opens a folder that displays a list of photos and photo subfolders.
Music—opens a folder that displays a list of music and music subfolders.
Video—opens a folder that displays a list of videos and video subfolders.
60
Start Using Your Server
If the logon name for the user account on your server does not match the logon name for your computer, you must enter a user name and password. For information about creating matching user accounts, see Why should logons names match? in the Windows Home Server Console
Help.
The Tools Section
Use the tools and settings on this tab to configure your HP MediaSmart Server.
HP Photo Publisher—Publish photos from your Server to your favorite photosharing site. Friends and family can see your photos on the Internet.
Preferences—Click to enter your Server name and password, also to set backup preferences.
Media Streamer—opens a web application for streaming music, videos, and photos in your home. For more information, see
.
Wake Server—Click Wakeup Server if you want to use the HP MediaSmart
Server during sleep hours. All of the lights on the Server will be off when it is
in sleep mode. For more information, see Power .
The Help & Support Section
Get information about using, configuring, and getting accessories for your HP MediaSmart Server.
User’s Guide—contains installation information, setup instructions, how to use the server, tutorials, and other important information.
Online support—go to the HP Support web site, where you can get more information about the HP MediaSmart Server.
Registration—Click to go to https://register.hp.com
and register your HP
MediaSmart Server. Registering your Server ensures that your information is on file with HP if you should need technical support services.
Need accessories?—get accessories for your server and shop HP Home &
Home Office.
Windows Home Server Console
O
PENING THE
W
I ND O W S
H
OME
S
ERVER
C
ONS OLE
The Windows Home Server Console is where you manage and configure the HP MediaSmart
Server. You can access the Windows Home Server Console in the following ways:
•
To open the WHS Console from the Start menu
•
To open the WHS Console from the HP MediaSmart Server desktop icon
•
To open the WHS Console from the system tray
61
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
To open the WHS Console from the Start menu
1. At the computer, click Start, All Programs, and then select Windows Home Server Console.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
To open the WHS Console from the HP MediaSmart Server desktop icon
1. From the computer desktop, double-click HP MediaSmart Server icon.
2. In the Control Center, click the Tools tab.
3. Click Home Server Console.
4. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
To open the WHS Console from the system tray
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
W
E L C O M E T O T H E
W
INDOWS
H
OME
S
ERVER
C
ONS OLE
Opening the Windows Home Server Console brings you to the following screen. This document explains or links to documents that will help you use the Windows Home Server console.
62
Start Using Your Server
The Top Banner
From the top banner you can click on a tab to open management windows, or click the Settings link to open the MediaSmart Server Settings. Clicking the Help link will open a help screen that deals the location you are at.
Click on any of the links below to open a help page for that document:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Network
•
•
63
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
The Settings Link will open up a page that allows you to configure settings:
You can configure the various settings by clicking on the title in the left panel.
Help
Clicking the help button will open up the help file for the server.
You can search help by clicking the Content, Index, or Search tab.
64
Start Using Your Server
Windows Home Server Console Left Panel
Clicking the selections on the left panel will allow you to configure your server. Links below the graphic will give you more information for that selection
Click the links below to learn more about the panes listed above:
•
65
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• Server Summary
• Remote Access
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
You can rearrange the position of the panes by:
• Hover over the pane, hold the left mouse button down and move the pane to the position you want to place it. or
• Hover over the pane until the up/down arrows appear. This will move pane to the top or bottom position.
Each pane has 3 conditions:
Informational
Configured/OK
Warning/Not Configured
Main Panel
The Main Panel will display whatever you have chosen from the left panel.
66
Start Using Your Server
T
HE
M
E D I A
S
MART
S
ERVER
T
AB
The MediaSmart tab contains the tools and settings for managing the HP features.
Welcome
This is the Home Server Console, you can set up and manage all of the HP MediaSmart Server features from here. The following items are already set up for you:
• Automatic PC backups Learn more
• Streaming Media (TwonkyMedia, Server for iTunes, and Web Streamer) Learn more
• McAfee Antivirus
Learn more
For the next steps, we recommend that you set up these features:
• User Accounts for each person in your home
• Remote Access so that you can access your server when you're away from home
• Server Online Backup
67
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• HP Media Collector
You can find these items on the left buttons of this screen.
Note
You can rearrange the buttons by dragging and dropping or with the top and bottom arrows.
Remote Access settings
Enjoy your digital experiences when and where you want. Remote Access gives you and your family access to:
• Files and supported computers from any location
• Remote Management of your server
Remote Media Streaming
• HP Photo Viewer
• HP Photo Publisher
HP Photo Publisher
Publish photos from your Server to your favorite photo-sharing site. Friends and family can see your photos on the Internet. Uploading your photos is a simple 4-step process:
1. Log on to the HP Photo Publisher
2. Log on to the photo-sharing site
3. Select the photos you want to share
4. Upload your photos
Media Collector
Media Collector copies media files from the computers in your network and organizes them on the server. Media Collector continuously copies files. You can enable collection for any or all the PCs in your home.
You choose the organization structure:
• Photos - by date or existing structure
• Music - by artist/album or existing structure
• Videos - move or copy to the server
Mac Features
Your HP MediaSmart Server works with Mac OS X 10.5 and later. You can:
• Use Time Machine to back up your Mac to the HP MediaSmart Server.
Get easy access to shared folders on the server using your Control Center.
68
Start Using Your Server
Settings for iTunes
Your HP MediaSmart Server includes a Server for iTunes. This server allows you to stream your music and playlists to computers that are running iTunes, or compatible devices.
Server Summary
Review important information about your Server at a glance.
Media Smart Server Online Backup
Online Backup uses an Amazon S3™ account to save your important files to a remote location on the Internet. You can also browse and restore your online files back to your Server. This feature is an Add-in that you can uninstall at any time.
T
HE
W
I ND O W S
H
OME
S
ERVER
T
ABS
The Windows Home Server enables you to share, store, access, and automatically protect your pictures, videos, music, and files. It contains the following tabs:
• Computers & Backups—view and customize backups. Also, view the status of your home computers. For more information, see Computers & Backup in the Windows Home Server
Console Help.
• User Accounts—add, remove, and modify user accounts. For more information, see User
Accounts in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
Shared Folders —add, open, remove, and view the properties of the shared folders on your server.
For more information, see Shared Folders in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
• Server Storage—view, add, repair, and remove hard drives from server storage. For more information, see Server Storage in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
• Network—displays health notifications from your server and your home computers. For more information, see Network Health in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
• Settings—configure general settings, such as date and time, backups, passwords, media sharing, remote access, add-ins, resources, and more. For more information, see Server Settings in the
Windows Home Server Console Help.
• Help—access the Windows Home Server Console Help.
A
BOUT
HP A
DD
-
I NS FOR
W
I N D O W S
H
OME
S
ER VER
HP add-ins are software programs that extend the functionality of Windows Home Server. HP is working with PacketVideo to provide enhanced media streaming using the TwonkyMedia add-in.
The McAfee add-in delivers server side anti-virus protection.
PacketVideo TwonkyMedia
The TwonkyMedia enhanced media streaming software add-in for the HP MediaSmart Server enables you to view photo thumbnails, available music album art, and stream content from any shared folder using a digital media player or a digital media receiver.
69
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Note
It is suggested that you use one media streaming program, either Windows Media Connect or
TwonkyMedia described above. Windows Media Connect is part of Windows Home Server and is already installed on the HP MediaSmart Server. Conversely, Hewlett-Packard partnered with
PacketVideo to provide the TwonkyMedia add-in. For a comparison of these programs, see
Windows Media Connect 2.0 and TwonkyMedia Comparison
.
McAfee Anti-virus Protection
To receive McAfee Anti-virus protection, you must activate the service. The McAfee anti-virus add-in with Total Protection Service is a comprehensive security management solution that:
• Checks for viruses, spyware, unwanted programs, and other potential threats. Every time a file is accessed on your Windows Home Server, Total Protection Service scans the file to make sure it is free of viruses and spyware.
• Sends security status information for your server to an administrative web site that is unique to your account, known as the McAfee SecurityCenter. You can visit the SecurityCenter to check detection reports or to set up security rules, known as policies, to define the types of programs that do not pose a security threat.
• Updates itself automatically at regular intervals with the latest versions of components and detection definition (dat) files. This ensures that Total Protection Service is always able to protect you against the latest threats.
Total Protection Service typically operates in the background without any interaction on your part.
To learn more about the McAfee anti-virus add-in, see their online documentation in one of the following languages:
• English— http://us.mcafee.com/root/campaign.asp?cid=39906&l=enu&action=whshelp
• French— http://us.mcafee.com/root/campaign.asp?cid=39906&l=fra&action=whshelp
• German— http://us.mcafee.com/root/campaign.asp?cid=39906&l=deu&action=whshelp
• Spanish— http://us.mcafee.com/root/campaign.asp?cid=39906&l=esp&action=whshelp
After you activate McAfee antivirus protection, you receive a seven month trial period. Internet access is required to receive updates. Subscription is required for updates after seven months.
Installing Add-ins
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. Click Settings in the upper right corner of the Console.
3. Click Add-ins in the left menu.
4. Click the Available tab.
5. Click Install to install an add-in.
6. Click OK on the Installation succeeded dialog box to restart the console.
For additional information, see Add-ins in the Windows Home Server help.
70
Start Using Your Server
F
IRST
S
TEPS
Customize Computer Backups
After running the Software Installation Disc on your first home computer it is automatically added to the list of computers that are backed up by the HP MediaSmart Server each night. Run the
Software Installation Disc on additional home computers to enable them to communicate with the server and to add them to nightly backups.
To customize the hard-drive volumes to back up, or to exclude folders from the backup
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click the Computers & Backups tab.
For assistance backing up or restoring a computer, see the following in the Windows Home Server
Console Help:
• Computers & Backup
• How does backup work?
• Managing and Configuring Backups
• Restoring Computer Backups
• Removing a Computer
• Troubleshooting Computers & Backup
Copy Files to Shared Folders
Shared folders are places for you to organize and store files on your home server so that you can share them with other people on your network. Start copying digital assets from your computer to shared folders on the HP MediaSmart Server.
Note
Do not delete the shared folders that come with the HP MediaSmart Server—Music, Photos,
Public, Software, or Videos. Likewise, do not delete the Mac shared folder if you intend to use
Mac features.
1. At the computer, double-click the HP MediaSmart Server desktop icon.
Or you can click the Shared Folders icon.
2. Copy Photos, Music, or Videos to the appropriate shared folder or click Server to create shared folders for other digital content.
71
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Note
From the Media Sharing page on the Windows Home Server Settings tab, you can turn on digital media streaming for the Photos, Music, or Videos shared folders. Click On for each folder that you want to stream from.
Windows Home Server Console Help for Shared Folders
For assistance using shared folders, see the following in the Windows Home Server Console Help:
• Shared Folder
• Adding a shared folder
• Viewing shared folder properties
• Opening a shared folder
• Removing a shared folder
• Viewing shared folder history
What is Folder Duplication ?
Accessing Shared Folders from your Computer
For convenience, the HP MediaSmart Server provides several ways to access shared folders:
• At the computer, click Start and Run. Type \\hpserver or the name of your server and click OK.
•
To access shared folders from the Control Center
•
To access shared folders from the desktop shortcut
•
To access shared folders from the system tray
•
To access shared folders from My Network Places in Windows XP
•
To access shared folders from Network in Windows Vista
To access shared folders from the Control Center
1. At the computer, click Start, All Programs, and then select HP MediaSmart Server.
2. Click one of the following:
• Server—opens a folder that contains all your shared folders.
• Photos—opens a folder for sharing photos.
• Music—opens a folder for sharing music.
• Videos—opens a folder for sharing videos.
72
Start Using Your Server
To access shared folders from the desktop shortcut
1. At the computer, go to the desktop, and then double-click the Shared Folders on Server shortcut
.
2. Double-click the shared folder you want to open.
To access shared folders from the system tray
1. Right-click the Windows Home Server icon.
2. Click Shared Folders.
3. Double-click the shared folder you want to open.
To access shared folders from My Network Places in Windows XP
1. At the computer, click Start, and then click My Network Places.
2. Double-click the shared folder you want to open.
3. If the shared folders are not in My Network places, you can add them manually.
To access shared folders from Network in Windows Vista
1. At the computer, click Start, and then Network.
2. In Network, double-click the computer icon next to SERVER .
If you changed the default name of the server, that name appears next to the computer icon instead.
3. Double-click the shared folder you want to open.
Enable Guest Account and Set up User Accounts
Enabling the Guest Account
If you want everyone to use the same logon account to access the HP MediaSmart Server, enable the guest account. If the Guest account is enabled with no password, family members are not required to logon when they use home computers. Additionally, all family members can have Full access to all shared folders through the Guest account.
Important
If you enable the Guest account, everyone that connects to your home network has the same privileges. That may mean that they all have full access to shared folders and other resources on your server. To protect your home network from unwanted connections, see
Securing your server from intruders
.
73
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Notes o We strongly recommend that you enable the Guest account and give the Guest account full permission on all your photos, music, and videos shared folders; this ensures that Media Collector always has access to all shares. o The Guest account cannot be used to access the server from outside of the home using remote access.
To enable the guest account
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click the User Accounts tab at the top of the page, the User Accounts Setup dialog displays.
4. Click Enable Guest.
Notes
If you have already asked the Enable Guest checkbox not to show again, double-click Guest account and click Enable.
Creating Individual User Accounts
If family members want to access information on your home network from an Internet café, coffee shop, or other location outside of your home, they need individual user accounts with strong passwords on their computer or laptop and on the server.
Important
When you create user accounts on the server, use logon names and passwords that match the logon names and passwords of existing user accounts on your home computers. Creating matching user accounts enables family members to automatically log on to the server when they log on to their home computer.
If the user accounts and passwords do not match, you will be prompted to type a user name and password when you open the server’s shared folders.
If your computer does not have a password or if the computer uses a factory default user name, you can change these parameters to eliminate the need to enter your user name and password when you access a shared folder.
To create a user account for a home computer running Windows XP
1. At the computer, click Start, Control Panel, and then User Accounts.
2. Click Add to create a user account.
-or-
Click Change an Account to change a logon name or password for an existing account.
A strong password is suggested to ensure security and is required to use remote access. A strong password must be at least 7 characters long and must fulfill three of the following four character criteria:
• Uppercase characters
74
Start Using Your Server
• Lowercase characters
• Numbers
• Symbols (such as !, @, #, and so on.)
A password hint helps you remember your password. The password hint can be seen by anybody who clicks the link to display it.
To create a user account for a home computer running Windows Vista
1. At the computer, click Start and then Control Panel.
2. Under User Accounts and Family Safety, select Add or remove user accounts.
3. Add user accounts or make changes to existing user accounts.
A strong password is suggested to ensure security and is required to use remote access. A strong password must be at least 7 characters long and must fulfill three of the following four character criteria:
• Uppercase characters
• Lowercase characters
• Numbers
• Symbols (such as !, @, #, and so on.)
A password hint helps you remember your password. The password hint can be seen by anybody who clicks the link to display it.
To create user accounts on the server
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click the User Accounts tab at the top of the page. If the User Accounts Setup dialog displays click OK.
4. Click Add, this will open the Add User Account screen. enter user information. Check the
Enable Remote Access for this user check box. Make an appropriate choice concerning allowing access to computer and folders.
5. Click Next.
6. Enter and confirm a strong password. A strong password is suggested to ensure security and is required to use remote access. A strong password must be at least 7 characters long and must fulfill three of the following four character criteria:
• Uppercase characters
• Lowercase characters
• Numbers
75
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• Symbols (such as !, @, #, and so on.)
7. Click Next.
8. Select access to shared folders
9. Click Finish.
10. Click Done.
Repeat for each user account that you want to add.
Add a user account for a home computer running Mac
1. Click System Preferences, Accounts.|
2. If the accounts page is locked, click the lock and enter you credentials to unlock the page.
76
3. Click the + to open the new account page.
Start Using Your Server
Enter the user information.
A strong password is suggested to ensure security and is required to use remote access. A strong password should be at least 7 characters long and fulfill three of the following four character criteria:
• Uppercase characters
• Lowercase characters
• Numbers
• Symbols (such as !, @, #, and so on.)
A password hint helps you remember your password.
77
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
5. Click Create Account.
Secure your Server from Intruders
The HP MediaSmart Server is designed as a device that is always on, which comes in handy for accessing files any time your network users need or want them. Additionally, remote access can allow visitors to view, add, and delete photos and videos. If not properly secured, these features present security risks, so you’ll want to ensure that unauthorized users can’t access your server and the files stored on it.
The following security measures help protect your network and computers:
• Firewall protection
• Wireless security
Anti-virus software
• User name and password protection
• Remote Access security
Firewall protection
A firewall is a hardware device or software program that protects your network from unauthorized access. It protects your system from hackers running programs, sending email, and gaining access to your private information. The following types of firewalls protect your network and computers:
Broadband router firewall
• Windows Home Server firewall
• Personal firewall
78
Start Using Your Server
Type
TCP
TCP
TCP
TCP
UDP
TCP
UDP
TCP
TCP
TCP
UDP
Broadband router firewall
The HP MediaSmart Server requires a broadband router. Broadband routers allow multiple computers and devices to share an internet connection using NAT (Network Address Translation) technology. NAT allows all the computers and devices on your network to use a single internet connection ( IP address ). NAT acts as a firewall by masking the real IP addresses of your network components—including the HP MediaSmart Server—which keeps them from being seen outside the home.
Some broadband routers implement Stateful Packet Inspection (SPI), which adds enhanced security by examining each packet of information before allowing it into the network. SPI can prevent advanced forms of incursions like Denial of Service attacks.
Windows Home Server firewall
Windows Home Server includes Windows Firewall, which protects communications between the server and the computers on your home network. This firewall is configured to allow remote access. It is not configurable by the user.
Personal firewall
A personal firewall is a software application that protects an individual computer. Because a personal firewall is behind the broadband firewall, it will protect the computer on which it is installed from attacks from other computers within the network.
Firewall ports
The following table lists the ports used by the server.
Ports used by the server
Port numbers
80, 443
55000, 56000
1138
8912
8912
2869
1900
3389
4125
139, 445
137, 138
Description
Standard Web site internal (subnet only) Web site for
Windows Home Server Web services
Transport
Backup and beacon
Backup and beacon
UPnP (Universal Plug and Play)
UPnP
Remote desktop
Remote access (when enabled)
File and print sharing
File and print sharing
79
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Ports used by the server
Port numbers Description Type
UDP 10284, 10283, 10282,
10281, 10280, 10243
Media connection
The following topics in the Windows Home Server Console Help discuss how to configure your router for port forwarding:
• Configuring your broadband router
• Why can't I connect to some computers?
• Learn more about router port forwarding
Wireless security
If your router comes with wireless capability, it has a piece of equipment called a Wireless Access
Point ( WAP ). A WAP can come within an all-in-one-gateway , router, or as a standalone unit. In many cases, WAP’s security settings are toggled off by default and you must manually turn on the security settings. If the security settings are toggled off, anyone can access your network and may be able to get into the server and any computer or other device on your network. Firewalls and anti-virus software do not keep intruders out of wireless networks.
Most wireless networking equipment supports two forms of data encryption as security features:
Wired Equivalent Privacy ( WEP )
Wi-Fi Protected Access ( WPA )
For more information on how to configure the security for your wireless network, see the user’s guide that came with your networking equipment.
Anti-virus software
You should install anti-virus software on all the computers on your network, and configure the software from one of the computers to scan all the shared folders on the server. You might be required to assign ( map ) drive letters to all your shared folders to enable the anti-virus software to scan the server.
Important
Remember to keep your anti-virus definitions up-to-date.
User name and password protection
User names and passwords help secure the server by requiring authentication for managing the server, accessing shared files, and using remote access.
Server password - during the first install of the HP MediaSmart Server, you are asked to create a strong password to allow access for managing your server from the Windows Home Server console. This password will protect the server from unwanted changes.
80
Start Using Your Server
• User account passwords - each person who uses your network must have a user account so they can access shared folders on the server or, if configured, use remote access. For more information, see User Accounts and Setting User Accounts Password Policy in the Windows Home Server
Console Help.
• Computer passwords - by using the same user name and password for logging onto a computer as for the server user account, you can avoid having to enter the user name and password when accessing a shared folder. Requiring logon to each computer on your network adds a level of security. For more information, see Why should logon names match? in the Windows Home
Server Console Help.
Remote Access security
By default Remote Access is turned off.
Using a computer to remotely access the files on your server is protected in several ways:
• Security certificate
HTTPS (encrypted Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol )
• User account with strong password
Security certificate
When you install the HP MediaSmart Server software on your home computers, the Windows
Home Server Connector software adds the Windows Home Server security certificate to the computer’s trusted certificate list. This security certificate helps secure the information that is exchanged between the server and your computer’s Web browser . The best way to access the files on the server while away from home is from a computer that has a browser and Internet access.
Using remote access to access your server from public or other untrusted computers is not recommended. Doing so can potentially expose your server to malicious software and viruses.
HTTPS
Remote Access is secure because the connection between the remote computer and the server is done over HTTPS. HTTPS uses the encrypted Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) protocol, the same protocol used for banking transactions and retail commerce.
User Account with strong password
Remote access does not allow logging on from the Guest or Administrator account. Moreover, the user account must be enabled for remote access, which requires a strong password to ensure that authentication is as secure as possible.
HP MediaSmart Photo Viewer
If you have configured a Domain name to your Server, any photos that are placed into photo viewer are viewable by any one that finds your domain. The Photos that are found and seen on this manner can not be deleted, nor can they be modified. Deleting photos can only be done by users that have successfully logged into the Server.
81
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Add Shared Folders to Network Places
How to add shared folders to network places in Windows XP and Windows Vista.
•
To add shared folders to My Network Places in Windows XP
•
To add a network place in Windows Vista
To add shared folders to My Network Places in Windows XP
1. At the computer, click Start, and then click My Computer.
Note
If you use the classic start menu, click My Computer on the desktop.
2. Under Other Places, click My Network Places.
3. Under Network Tasks, click Add a network place.
4. In the Add Network Place Wizard, click Next.
5. Highlight Choose another network location, and then click Next.
6. To add the network place, you have two options:
In the Internet or network address box, enter the path to the shared folder you want to map , and then click Next.
For example, enter \\HPSERVER\Music
Where HPSERVER is the default name. If you changed the name of the server, use that name.
Music is the shared folder’s name.
• Click the Browse button and then use Windows Explorer to locate the network place.
The path is usually: Entire Network, Microsoft Windows Network, Workgroup, <Name of Server>.
7. After locating the shared folder, click to highlight it, and then click OK.
The location will appear in the Folder box.
8. Specify whether you want to reconnect every time that you log on to your computer, and then click Finish.
Once you create a network place for one of the shared folders, the other shared folders on the server will be available on My Network Places.
To add a network place in Windows Vista
Note
Network discovery must be turned on to add a shared folder to Network places in Windows Vista.
1. At the computer, click Start, and then click Network.
2. Under Network Tasks, click Add a network place.
3. In the Network Place Wizard, click Next.
4. Highlight Choose another network location, and then click Next.
5. To add the network place, you have two options:
82
Start Using Your Server
• In the Internet or network address box, enter the path to the shared folder you want to map, and then click Next.
For example, enter \\HPSERVER\Software
Where HPSERVER is the default name. If you changed the name of the server, use that name. Software is shared folder’s name.
• Click the Browse button and then use Windows Explorer to locate the network place.
The path is usually: Entire Network, Microsoft Windows Network, Workgroup, <Name of Server>.
After locating the shared folder, click to highlight it, and then click OK. The location will appear in the Internet or network address box.
6. To create a name for the network place, enter a name in the Type a name for this network place box, and then click Next.
7. Specify whether you want to reconnect every time that you log on to your computer, and then click Finish.
About HP Add-ins for Windows Home Server
HP add-ins are software programs that extend the functionality of Windows Home Server. HP is working with PacketVideo to provide enhanced media streaming using the TwonkyMedia add-in.
The McAfee add-in delivers server side anti-virus protection.
PacketVideo TwonkyMedia
The TwonkyMedia enhanced media streaming software add-in for the HP MediaSmart Server enables you to view photo thumbnails, available music album art, and stream content from any shared folder using a digital media player or a digital media receiver.
Note
It is suggested that you use one media streaming program, either Windows Media Connect or
TwonkyMedia described above. Windows Media Connect is part of Windows Home Server and is already installed on the HP MediaSmart Server. Conversely, Hewlett-Packard partnered with
PacketVideo to provide the TwonkyMedia add-in. For a comparison of these programs, see
Windows Media Connect 2.0 and TwonkyMedia Comparison
.
McAfee Anti-virus Protection
To receive McAfee Anti-virus protection, you must activate the service. The McAfee anti-virus add-in with Total Protection Service is a comprehensive security management solution that:
• Checks for viruses, spyware, unwanted programs, and other potential threats. Every time a file is accessed on your Windows Home Server, Total Protection Service scans the file to make sure it is free of viruses and spyware.
• Sends security status information for your server to an administrative web site that is unique to your account, known as the McAfee SecurityCenter. You can visit the SecurityCenter to check detection reports or to set up security rules, known as policies, to define the types of programs that do not pose a security threat.
• Updates itself automatically at regular intervals with the latest versions of components and detection definition (dat) files. This ensures that Total Protection Service is always able to protect you against the latest threats.
83
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Total Protection Service typically operates in the background without any interaction on your part.
To learn more about the McAfee anti-virus add-in, see their online documentation in one of the following languages:
• English— http://us.mcafee.com/root/campaign.asp?cid=39906&l=enu&action=whshelp
• French— http://us.mcafee.com/root/campaign.asp?cid=39906&l=fra&action=whshelp
• German— http://us.mcafee.com/root/campaign.asp?cid=39906&l=deu&action=whshelp
• Spanish— http://us.mcafee.com/root/campaign.asp?cid=39906&l=esp&action=whshelp
After you activate McAfee antivirus protection, you receive a seven month trial period. Internet access is required to receive updates. Subscription is required for updates after seven months.
Installing Add-ins
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. Click Settings in the upper right corner of the Console.
3. Click Add-ins in the left menu.
4. Click the Available tab.
5. Click Install to install an add-in.
6. Click OK on the Installation succeeded dialog box to restart the console.
For additional information, see Add-ins in the Windows Home Server help.
Configure HP MediaSmart Server Settings
P
O W E R
The Power Management screen allows you to put the Server into a sleep mode to save power.
The Enable Daily Sleep Time checkbox allows the Server to be put into a sleep mode and wake up based on times entered into the Sleep time and Wake time fields.
Note
The server will wake up for a scheduled backup.
Clicking the Sleep Now button puts the Server into sleep mode. The server will wake up for a backup, input from the Control Center, or pressing the power button on the Server.
84
Start Using Your Server
HP M
E D I A
S
MART
S
ERVER
S
O F T W A R E
U
P D A T E
Use the HP MediaSmart software update to keep your server and home computers current with the latest HP software, online help, and new features.
HP MediaSmart software update does not update the Microsoft Windows Home Server operating system. For information about updating Windows Home Server, see Configuring Windows
Update in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
To Configure HP MediaSmart Software Update
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. Click Settings in the upper right of the Console.
85
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
3. Select HP MediaSmart Server in the left menu and click the HP Update tab.
4. In the Configure section you have choices to
Configure HP Software Update Options
Automatically download and install updates
(recommended)
Option Additional information
Requires no user action.
Downloads and installs updates on the server in the background. If necessary the server will automatically reboot.
Download updates and let me choose when to install
Requires user action.
Your computer notifies you that an update has been downloaded and is ready to install on the server.
Additionally, the Install link turns blue under HP
MediaSmart software updates.
To update the server after an update is downloaded, click Install under HP MediaSmart software updates in the Windows Home Server Console
Turn off automatic updates Not recommended.
To get updates with this choice you will have to click
Check for updates located in the Version section.
86
Start Using Your Server
5. The following information and options are in the Version section of the HP Update dialog
• The server software version number and date are shown.
• Click Check for updates to immediately check for available software updates, regardless of the configuration settings you selected above.
• The Install link becomes active when an update has been downloaded, but not installed.
Click Install to run the server update.
• The Rollback link becomes active when a software update has been installed. Use this link to uninstall the update on the server and revert to the previous server software version.
Important
Clicking Install or Rollback only makes changes to the server software. Each home computer still needs to be updated or rolled back so that the server and client computers are running the
same version of software. See Updating and Rolling Back Client PCs
Back Mac Clients for more information.
N
O T I F I CA T I O N S
The Notifications screen gives you control of which notifications will show up as messages in your system tray.
The example below has all notifications turned on.
87
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
An example of a new server add-in is also displayed.
LED
The LED screen gives you control of two different LED behaviors.
The LED brightness control allows you to adjust the brightness of all LEDs on the front panel of the Server. Grab the slider and move for a brighter or dimmer LED.
The Health LED Behavior checkbox allows for the Server’s health LED to show red you for any
Critical Windows Home Server health notifications.
HP M
E D I A
S
MART
S
ERVER
S
E T T I N GS
, H
ARDWARE
T
AB
Information presented on this screen is gathered from various sensors within the Server Solution:
88
Start Using Your Server
HP M
E D I A
S
MART
S
ERVER
S
E T T I N GS
, S
UPPORT
T
AB
The Support tab shows:
• The HP Software Version
The BIOS Version
• The Serial Number of the Server
• Links for Online Support and More information
• Access to the Server event logs
89
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
G
ETTING
H
ELP FOR
U
SING
Y
OUR
S
ERVER
The HP MediaSmart Server is a home server for families with multiple computers on a home network who want to enjoy their digital experiences when and where they want. The HP
MediaSmart Server includes remote access to files, automatic computer backups, virtually unlimited storage expandability, and media streaming to the entertainment center.
Help is available from most windows on the HP MediaSmart Server.
HP MediaSmart Server Help
HP Help includes the types of help shown in the following table. Additionally, the online User’s
Guide provides links to topics in the Windows Home Server Help.
User’s Guide—Contains online help, installation instructions, guidance for set up, using the product, tutorials, recovery information, and other important information.
Online Help—A Help button is available on most pages.
HP Support Web site—Additional support and informational articles are available at http://www.hp.com/support .
90
Start Using Your Server
Windows Home Server Console Help
Some tasks, such as creating users and using shared folders , are done through the Windows Home
Server Console.
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click Help in the upper right corner, indicated by a icon, or click help buttons on dialog boxes.
Windows Home Server Console Help
Main Topics
Welcome to the Windows Home Server
Console
Computers & Backup
User Accounts
Shared Folders
Server Storage
Network Health
Windows Home Server Settings
Remote Access
Description
Learn what the Windows Home Server tray icon colors mean. This topic also provides an overview of adding user accounts, organizing files, configuring backups, and customizing server settings.
Explains how backups work and how to configure, restore, and troubleshoot backups.
How to add users to your server.
Adding, opening, removing, viewing the history of shared folders, and using folder duplication .
View, add, repair, and remove hard drives from total storage.
What health notifications mean and what to do about them.
How to configure backups, passwords, media sharing, remote access, add-ins, resources, and more.
How to set up the server to easily access your files away from home.
91
Chapter 3.
HP Photo Publisher
HP P
HOTO
P
UBLISHER
H
OME
P
AGE
To access the HP Photo Publisher Home Page, log onto the Windows Home Server Console. At the HP MediaSmart Server tab, click the HP Photo Publisher button in the left pane to open the
Photo Publisher home page.
Photo Publisher allows you to post photos from your Server to the photo sharing and social networking sites shown above.
File Compatibility
The table below tells what file types are accepted at the various photo sharing and social networking sites:
93
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
*.jpg, *.jpeg *.gif *.png *.bmp
Picasa X X X X
Snapfish X facebook X X X X flickr
MediaSmart
Photo Viewer
X X
X X X
Some limitations, by site, for the free account:
• At time of writing; flickr only allows for 3 photo sets, and a limit of 100MB worth of photo uploads each calendar month.
• At time of writing; facebook allows only 60 photos for album, but you can have an unlimited number of albums
• At time of writing; Picasa has a storage limit of 250mb
• At time of writing; Snapfish does not have any restriction to number of photos uploaded.
HP P
HOTO
P
UBLISHER
L
OG ON
P
AGE
To login to HP Photo Publisher:
94
HP Photo Publisher
1. On the Windows Home Server Console, click the HP Photo Publisher panel, then click the
Launch HP Photo Publisher link.
95
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
2. Enter your Username, Password and click the Log On button.
3. You will be brought the HP Photo Publisher home page.
4. If you entered incorrect credentials then you be brought to the Remote Access page. Click the HP
Photo Publisher and you will be brought to the HP Photo Publisher home page.
96
HP Photo Publisher
U
PLOAD
P
HOTOS OR
C
REATE AN
A
LBUM
Here you can select to upload to an existing album or you can create a new album or set.
Use the drop down arrow beside the upload to an existing album field, to select an existing album on the photo sharing site.
To create a new album on the photo sharing site you can enter a name and the album is created for you.
Note
Flickr uses the term set instead of album. Another term that Flickr uses is photo stream. The
photo stream is the default presentation mode for Flickr and uses no sets.
97
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
S
ELECT
P
HOTOS
Photo Publisher will query the server and present a list of folders and photos available to the current user.
Click the Arrow to see an expanded view of folders
98
HP Photo Publisher
You can select an entire folder by putting a check in the checkbox by the folder, or you can select individual files using the checkboxes beside individual files. Once you have finished your selections click Finish. The photos selected will now upload to the photo sharing site you are logged onto.
Only file types that are supported by the photo sharing site are available to upload
The table below tells what file types are accepted at the various photo sharing and social networking sites:
Picasa
Snapfish
*.jpg, *.jpeg
X
X
*.gif
X
*.png
X
*.bmp
X flickr
MediaSmart Photo Viewer
X
X
X
X X
99
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
S
ERVER
C
ONTINUES
U
PLOADING
This page gives a status concerning the uploading of the photos.
If the browser stops responding, you can close the browser, or you can visit another Web site; your
HP MediaSmart Server will continue the upload.
S
NAPFISH
Snapfish Logon
To login to Snapfish, enter your credentials. Click Next.
After your credentials are accepted, this takes you to a page where you can create or add to albums.
100
HP Photo Publisher
F
LICKR
Flickr Log On Page
To logon to Flickr, click the blue Log On link as shown below.
101
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
This takes you to the Flickr sign in page. Enter your credentials and return to the HP Photo
Publisher page.
Flickr then asks you to allow HP MediaSmart Server to link to your account.
Click OK, I’LL ALLOW IT
102
HP Photo Publisher
This takes you to the Flickr confirmation page. Close this page.
Click Next.
This takes you to the HP Photo Publisher Albums page.
103
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
You can now create or add to albums.
F
ACEBOOK
Facebook Logon
To log into your facebook account click the Log on link.
You will be taken to a page to enter your credentials for that site.
104
This takes you to the facebook confirmation page. Close this page.
HP Photo Publisher
At the Photo Publisher login screen click Next. You are then taken to a page where you can create or add to an existing album.
P
ICASA
Picasa Logon
To logon to Picasa, enter your credentials as shown in the figure below. Click Next.
After your credentials are accepted, this takes you to a page where you can upload photos and create albums.
105
Chapter 4.
HP Photo Viewer
HP M
EDIA
S
MART
P
HOTO
V
IEWER
H
OME
P
AGE
The Photo Viewer Home Page gives you the opportunity to View, Rename, Delete an album Photo
Viewer lets you make an album Public or Private.
The Public/Private choice is designed for additional privacy for Server owners that have set up their servers for remote access. This feature allows the administrator to make an album private, while allowing access to friends and family that know the URL of the album.
To share a Private album:
1. Open the Album
2. Either
• Use your browser’s menu to send the URL, click File, Send, Link by E-mail to start sending an email to outside users
107
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• Copy the URL http://myserver.homeserver.com/PhotoViewer/album633689042886093750/index.xml to paste into your email.
NOTE: Make sure you use the URL that has been set up for Internet/Remote Access. Using local address for your album such as: http://hpserver/PhotoViewer/album633689042886093750/index.xml will not work for remote users.
3. Send the URL to your friend or family member, and they can now gain access to the Album
HP P
HOTO
V
IEWER
S
LIDESHOW
You have two choices:
• Filmstrip View
• Slideshow View
108
HP Photo Viewer
Filmstrip View
Viewing the album in Filmstrip, you will see a screen similar to the below. As long as you are logged into the server you will have see three buttons on the left: Download, Photo Caption, and
Remove.
If you have been logged off the server due to inactivity you will only see the Download button.
Click the Login link in the upper right part of the screen and provide credentials to log back on.
The Download Button allows visitors to download the photo to there Computer.
109
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Photo Caption allows you add a caption for the photo. Enter text in the field that appears below the photo as shown in the example below. Click the Save button to keep the Caption
110
HP Photo Viewer
Remove lets you remove the photo from the album, please note that the photo still remains on the
Server. Click Yes or No to confirm the removal.
Slideshow View
Viewing the album in Slideshow will give you larger views of the photos. If the photo has a caption, it will show as in the example below.
111
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
The Control Bar for the slideshow will appear towards the bottom of the screen.
The slider half of the bar controls how fast the next photo will show. The button will bring up the previous photo in the slideshow, the
button will bring up the next photo in the slideshow, and the switch; playing or pausing the slideshow.
button is a toggle
112
HP Photo Viewer
U
PLOAD
P
HOTOS OR
C
REATE AN
A
LBUM
Here you can select to upload to an existing album or you can create a new album or set.
Use the drop down arrow beside the upload to an existing album field, to select an existing album on the photo sharing site.
To create a new album on the photo sharing site you can enter a name and the album is created for you.
Note
Flickr uses the term set instead of album. Another term that Flickr uses is photo stream. The
photo stream is the default presentation mode for Flickr and uses no sets.
S
ELECT
P
HOTOS
Photo Publisher will query the server and present a list of folders and photos available to the current user.
Click the Arrow to see an expanded view of folders
113
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
You can select an entire folder by putting a check in the checkbox by the folder, or you can select individual files using the checkboxes beside individual files. Once you have finished your selections click Finish. The photos selected will now upload to the photo sharing site you are logged onto.
Only file types that are supported by the photo sharing site are available to upload
The table below tells what file types are accepted at the various photo sharing and social networking sites:
Picasa
Snapfish
*.jpg, *.jpeg
X
X
*.gif
X
*.png
X
*.bmp
X flickr
MediaSmart Photo Viewer
X
X
X
X X
114
HP Photo Viewer
HP M
EDIA
S
MART
P
HOTO
V
IEWER
A
LBUM
M
ISSING
P
HOTOS
When viewing an album I have missing photos.
This occurs when photos that have been added to an album have been moved from the location that they were originally located when the photos were added to the album. The photos may still reside on the server, just in a different location. A Photo Album is very much like a play list – it contains a reference to photos on your server, but does not contain its own copy of these photos.
To remove the missing photos placeholders:
1. Log into Photo Viewer as the administrator
2. Open the album.
3. Click the Yes button in the Remove Photos dialog.
115
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
116
Chapter 5.
Features for Mac
I
NSTALLING AND
U
NINSTALLING
S
OFTWARE ON THE
M
AC
•
•
To Install the Mac Software
The Server has to be configured first using a Windows Client. Once the Windows Home Server
Connector has been installed you can install the Features for the Mac.
Note
You must have administrative privileges on your computer to install the software. Click System
Preferences, Accounts, and check Allow user to administer this computer.
1. Once Windows Home Server has been installed on a Windows home computer, insert the installation CD and a screen will appear with 2 icons, one for install and one for uninstall.
2. Double click the Install HP MediaSmart Server Software.pkg to begin the install process.
117
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
3. On the Welcome to the HP MediaSmart Server Software click Continue to install.
4. The End User license Agreement will pop up, click Continue to agree.
5. A standard install screen will appear, this screen will report how much room is available for the install on the default location. You do have a button to press to change location if you desire.
Otherwise click Install.
118
Features for Mac
6. Once the install is completed a confirmation screen will appear followed by a settings or a preferences screen.
7. The confirmation screen can be closed or left open. It will not effect the rest of this process. Click
Close, to close the summary screen.
8. On the settings screen you will need to enter the server name and the server’s administrator
password so that the Mac software can access your Server. The authentication process begins when you stop typing the password.
9. Once your credentials have been authenticated, click Apply to save the server name and password.
Note
Server Name and Password have to be authenticated prior to using the control center, or entering preferences for BackUp.
10. After clicking Apply, you can click BackUp to set your BackUp Preferences. Or you can click
Show All to go to the Control Center.
119
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
To Uninstall the Mac Software
After the Mac software has been installed, should you decide to un-install the Mac software, insert the Software Installation Disc and a screen opens with two icons, one for install and one for uninstall.
1. Double click the Uninstall HP MediaSmart Server Software to begin the process.
2. Follow the on screen instructions to complete the uninstall process, click Continue, and then click
Close on the Summary screen.
120
Features for Mac
U
PDATING AND
R
OLLING
B
ACK
M
AC
C
LIENTS
Updating Mac Clients
Important
Update the server software prior to updating the client software. The server update and the Mac client update are downloaded at the same time through the HP Update mechanism in the Windows
Home Server Console. Updating the server ensures that the most recent copy of the HP MSS
Client.dmg is on your server and ready to install. See Updating and Rolling Back the Server for
more information.
1. Insert the Software Installation Disc and run it, or
Select the server name in the left side of the Finder and connect to the server.
The name of the server is HPSERVER, unless you renamed it during the original installation.
Choose Software > Mac, and then run HP MSS Client.dmg.
2. When the software window opens, click Uninstall HP MediaSmart Server Software.
Moving the application to the trash can will not uninstall it properly.
3. After the uninstall is complete, click Install HP MediaSmart Server Software.pkg to install the update.
Rolling Back Mac Clients
Important
Roll back the server software prior to rolling back the Mac client software. When the server is rolled back using the HP Update mechanism in the Windows Home Server Console, it also rolls back the HP MSS Client.dmg file that is located on the server. See
for more information.
121
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
1. Go to Finder > Applications, and then drag and drop HP MediaSmart Server Control Center to the Trash.
2. Select the server name in the left side of the Finder and connect to the server.
The name of the server is HPSERVER, unless you renamed it during the original installation.
3. Choose Software > Mac, and then run HP MSS Client.dmg.
4. When the software window opens, click Install HP MediaSmart Server Software.pkg to install the update.
Checking the Mac Client Version Number
It is important for the Server software and the Mac client software to be on the same version in order for them to work together properly. Complete the following steps to confirm that the server and the client are on the same version.
1. To check the Mac client software version number, go to Finder > Applications, and open the HP
MediaSmart Control Center on the Mac.
2. At the top of the screen select HP MediaSmart Server Control Center > About HP
MediaSmart Control Center.
The Mac client version number is displayed in the About dialog.
3. To check the server software version number go to a PC and double-click the Windows Home
Server icon in the system tray and log on.
4. Click Settings in the upper right of the Console.
5. Select HP MediaSmart Server in the left menu and click the HP Update tab.
The version number is at the bottom of the HP Update tab.
Note
Server version 2.1.7.24261 and Mac client version 1.0.0b20 work together. Starting with version
2.5, the server and the client version numbers will have the same first two numbers.
122
Features for Mac
The server and client software should have compatible version numbers. The following table lists the version numbers that work together.
Compatible Software Version Numbers
Server Version PC Client Version Mac Client Version
1.3.6.21622 1.2.1.18999, N/A
1.3.8.25155 1.2.1.18999, 1.3.6.21622,
1.3.8.25155
N/A
2.1.7.24261 2.1.7.24261 1.0.0b20
2.5 2.5 2.5
C
ONNECTING
Y
OUR
M
AC TO THE
S
ERVER
File sharing is a key advantage of having a home server. The HP MediaSmart Server enables you to place documents, music, photos, or videos on the server and share them with all of the Macs and PCs in your household. This document explains how to connect your Mac to the server so you can access shared folder contents.
•
Before Connecting to the Server
•
Connection Method A: Using the Finder
123
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
•
Connection Method B: Using Connect to Server
Before Connecting to the Server
Some setup and decisions are required before connecting your Mac computer to the server and accessing shared folders .
• The server software is installed on one PC.
• Decide how you will connect to the server—administrator account, user account, or guest account.
Types of Accounts
Type of
Account
Guest Account
Description Account Creation
User Account
The guest account is useful when people are visiting your home and need temporary access to your server. In these cases, it probably does not make sense to create a user account for each person. Instead, you can create a single guest account that all visitors use. The guest account may or may not have a password.
Go to a PC and double-click the
Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
Select the User Accounts tab.
Double-click the Guest account and click Enable Account… on the
Properties dialog.
You have the option to create a password for the guest account or leave it blank. Click the Shared
Folder tab to define folder access.
The server pairs user accounts on the server with those on a computer to identify who is connecting to the server and to maintain security. Each server user account has a unique user name and password that should match their computer log on name and password. Each user account on the server can have their own shared folder access levels.
Go to a PC and double-click the
Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
Select the User Accounts tab.
Click Add from the Windows Home
Server Console User Accounts tab.
Complete the information in the
Add User Account wizard.
Administrator
Account
Connecting as the server administrator gives you access to all shared folders on the server. The administrator account's user name is always Administrator.
The server administrator account is created the first time you install the server software on a PC. You enter a password during the installation.
See
Installing Software on the First
• If you created a User Account on the server, create a matching User Account on the Mac if it does not already exist. The Mac user account should have the same user name and password as the server user account.
On the Mac computer, choose Apple menu > System Preferences > Accounts. On the Accounts dialog, verify the dialog features are unlocked and click "+" to add a user account. Complete the information on the Accounts dialog.
124
Features for Mac
Connection Method A: Using the Finder
Connecting to the HP MediaSmart Server using the Finder is quick and easy. The Finder can also remember your server logon settings so subsequent connections are effortless.
1. At the Mac computer, choose File > New Finder Window.
2. Click HPSERVER in the Shared category of the left Sidebar. If you renamed the HP MediaSmart
Server during the first installation, select that name in the Shared category.
Note
The same Sidebar shows up in Save and Open dialog boxes of your programs too, making your server available to you for opening and saving files.
If you don’t see the server in the Finder window’s Shared category,
• The server may not be connected to the network,
• The Mac computer may not be connected to the network,
• Or maybe the check box is turned off for Connected Servers and Bonjour Computers in Finder > Preferences... > Sidebar.
3. If you are not automatically connected to the server, click Connect As....
Precisely how you connect to the server depends on what kind of server account you are using:
Guest, User Account, or Administrator.
• Guest account with no password—You are automatically connected to the server when you click its name in the Finder.
• Guest account with a password—In the dialog that opens, select Registered User, type the server's Guest account Password, and click Connect. You do not need to change the
Name. Check Remember this password in my keychain to remember your settings and automatically connect to the server in the future.
125
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• User account— If you have a User Account on the server, select Registered User, type the Name and Password that was created in the server's user account in the Windows
Home Server Console, and click Connect. Check Remember this password in my
keychain to remember your settings and automatically connect to the server in the future.
• Administrator account—Alternately, you can connect to the server using the server's administrator account. Select Registered User, type Administrator for the Name, and type the server's Password. The server's password was created the first time you installed the server software on a PC.
4. Navigate to the folder you want on the server.
The folders that display depend on the Shared Folder Access settings for the guest account or user account that you used to connect to the server. To change Shared Folder Access settings, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray on a PC and log on to the
Console. Click the User Accounts tab and double-click the guest account or user account. Select the Shared Folder Access tab to change settings. Click OK to accept the changes.
If you connected to the server using the Administrator account, you will see all of the server's shared folders.
Connection Method B: Using Connect to Server
Follow these steps to connect to Windows File Sharing (SMB) from Mac OS X 10.5 or later. SMB is the native sharing protocol for Microsoft Windows operating systems.
1. At the Mac computer, choose Go > Connect to Server… on the Apple menu bar.
Click Browse on the Connect to Server dialog to open the Finder and connect using Method A
described above.
Type the Server Address using the following syntax: smb://ServerName/ShareName
For example, type the following server address to connect to the music shared folder: smb://hpserver/music
126
Features for Mac
If you renamed your server during the first software installation, remember to use that server name instead of HPSERVER. A shared folder name is required. The shared folder name cannot contain spaces; type %20 instead of spaces. Additionally, you cannot connect to a shared folder name that contains a hyphen.
The Mac computer may not recognize the server's name in some cases. If that happens, connect to the server using its IP address instead of the server name. If you are unsure of your server's IP address, you can log on to your router to see a list of IP addresses for all network connected devices. To log on to your router, open an Internet browser window , type the router's IP address in the address bar and press Enter. The router's IP address will be one of the following,
• 192.168.1.1,
• 192.168.0.1, or
• Obtain your router's IP address from a Mac by selecting Apple menu > System
Preferences > Network. Select Built-in Ethernet on the left menu. The router IP address is on the right side of the Network dialog.
127
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
On a PC, select Start > Run. Type cmd and click OK. In the DOS window, type ipconfig and press Enter. Use the Default Gateway IP address to log on to your router.
Once logged in to the router, look for a list of connected devices. Each router is different. See your router's documentation if you do not find the server's IP address right away. Once you find your server's IP address, return to the Connect to Server dialog on the Mac and enter the server address.
Your address will be different but will look similar to the following, smb://192.168.0.180/music
Note
Click "+" to add the server address to your list of favorites.
3. Click Connect.
128
Features for Mac
To troubleshoot a connection failure, you can ping the server by opening a Finder window and choosing Applications > Utilities > Network Utility. Select the Ping tab, type the server's IP address, and click Ping. A successful ping verifies a connection between the Mac computer and the server.
If you are unable to ping the server, check that the server is on and that all network cables are securely connected. You may also need to reset your router.
4. Log on to the server using either a guest account, user account, or administrator account.
See Step 3 in Method A above for detailed information on logging on to the server.
HP M
EDIA
S
MART
S
ERVER
C
ONTROL
C
ENTER FOR
M
AC
The Control Center is the starting point for accessing the features of the HP MediaSmart Server.
The Control Center has three sections:
Browse—Access your shared folders .
• Tools—Tools and settings for configuring your server.
• Help & Support—Learn to use the HP MediaSmart Server and connect to online support.
Opening the Control Center for Mac
The Control Center can be accessed from the following:
Using the Finder—at the computer, click Finder, Applications, and then select HP MediaSmart Server Control Center.
On the Dock—at the computer, double-click the HP MediaSmart Server icon on the Dock.
Desktop icon—at the computer, double-click the HP MediaSmart Server
Control Center icon on the desktop.
The Control Center desktop icon and system tray icon are available only if you selected to create them during installation.
129
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
About the HP MediaSmart Server Control Center for Mac
The Browse Section
Shared folders are places to help you get started saving and organizing your files so that you can share them with other people on your network.
Server—opens a folder that displays a list of all your shared folders.
Photos—opens a folder that displays a list of photos and photo subfolders.
Music—opens a folder that displays a list of music and music subfolders.
Video—opens a folder that displays a list of videos and video subfolders.
If the logon name for the user account on your server does not match the logon name for your computer, you must enter a user name and password. For information about creating matching user accounts, see Why should logons names match? in the Windows Home Server Console
Help.
The Tools Section
Use the tools and settings on this tab to configure your HP MediaSmart Server.
HP Photo Publisher—Publish photos from your Server to your favorite photosharing site. Friends and family can see your photos on the Internet.
Preferences—Click to enter your Server name and password, also to set backup preferences.
130
Features for Mac
Media Streamer—opens a web application for streaming music, videos, and photos in your home. For more information, see
.
Wake Server—Click Wakeup Server if you want to use the HP MediaSmart
Server during sleep hours. All of the lights on the Server will be off when it is
in sleep mode. For more information, see Power .
The Help & Support Section
Get information about using, configuring, and getting accessories for your HP MediaSmart Server.
User’s Guide—contains installation information, setup instructions, how to use the server, tutorials, and other important information.
Online support—go to the HP Support web site, where you can get more information about the HP MediaSmart Server.
Registration—Click to go to https://register.hp.com
and register your HP
MediaSmart Server. Registering your Server ensures that your information is on file with HP if you should need technical support services.
Need accessories?—get accessories for your server and shop HP Home &
Home Office.
M
AC
B
ACKUP AND
R
ESTORE
This document has instructions for,
•
Determining_Used_Space_on_Your_Local_Disk
•
Configuring_Time_Machine_Backups
•
•
•
Determining Used Space on Your Local Disk
Begin by finding out how much space your data currently occupies on your startup disk.
1. Open a Finder window and select the Local disk.
2. On the Apple menu bar, choose File > Get Info.
3. In the window that opens, look in the General section next to find the Used disk space.
131
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Now, multiply the used disk space by 1.2; the result is the minimum amount of disk space Time
Machine can work with. (That’s because Time Machine needs space for all your files plus some extra room to enable it to store new data and multiple copies of files that change.) However, more space is always better, because it enables Time Machine to retain backups that go further into the past. A backup disk with at least 1.5 times as much free space as the amount occupied on your local disk is recommended, and more if possible. If you find that you need more space for Time
Machine later, you can resize the backup disk space.
Configuring Time Machine Backups
Before you begin,
• The HP MediaSmart Server software has to be installed on your Mac. See
• You must be logged on to the Mac with an account that has administrator privileges.
To configure the HP MediaSmart Server as a valid Time Machine backup device,
1. Choose Finder > Applications > HP MediaSmart Server Control Center > Preferences.
2. On the Server tab, enter the server name and the server’s administrator password.
This information is used by Time Machine to set up the backup destination, as well as the links to the shares on the server. This information may have been entered at the end of the Mac software install. If so, you will be authenticated automatically.
132
Features for Mac
3. Select the Backup tab and type a Backup Disk Size.
The suggested minimum disk space size displays in the dialog based on approximately 1.5 times the size of your used disk space. However, HP recommends creating a backup disk that is at least as large as your total local disc capacity, or larger if possible. When choosing a backup disk size, you may want to consider how much you use your Mac and how much disk space you have available on your server. The backup disk size cannot exceed the amount of free space that you have available on one server disk.
Important
You can resize your backup disk later if you need more room. Resizing the backup disk overwrites the current backup disk and causes all data to be lost. See
133
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Note
The location for the backup is on the server at \\HPSERVER\Mac\Backup. If the Mac shared folder has been deleted from the server (you must use a Windows PC to do this), you must create the Mac folder.
4. Click Apply.
This process can take quite some time based on the size of the backup disk and server activity.
Once the formatting process is complete, the Backup Disk Status changes to Started.
The backup file will be located at \\<server name>\Mac\Backup. The filename is based on the serial number of the Mac system, and cannot be changed. Do not manually delete or rename this file.
5. Click Open Time Machine Preferences, click Choose Backup Disk and select Backup to HP
MediaSmart Server as the backup disk.
Backup to HP MediaSmart Server may already be selected. You typically have to change the backup location to the HP MediaSmart Server if you had a previous Time Machine backup that pointed to a different location.
Changing the Backup Disk Size
The backup disk size can be changed; however, all previous backup data will be lost.
1. Choose Finder > Applications > HP MediaSmart Server Control Center > Preferences.
2. In the Backup Disk Status, click Stop.
The Backup Disk Status changes to Stopped and the virtual disk icon on the desktop goes away after the backup disk is stopped.
134
Features for Mac
Note
You may have to wait several minutes for the backup disk to stop. Please be patient. If the backup disk does not stop and it appears to hang, it could be because an application or other process is accessing the backup disk in the background. If this is the case, attempt to eject the disk using Finder.
3. Enter a new value in the Backup Disk Size and select Resize from the action menu.
You cannot select Resize until the disk is stopped and the disk size is changed.
4. Click Apply.
5. A pop up warning appears informing you the file already exists, and that continuing will erase the existing backup data and start over. To continue with the new size click Delete and Continue.
Deleting a Backup Disk
You may want to delete a backup disk if you need to free up space on your server for other things or if you are no longer using your Mac.
1. Choose Finder > Applications > HP MediaSmart Server Control Center > Preferences.
2. In the Backup Disk Status, click Stop.
The Backup Disk Status changes to Stopped and the virtual disk icon on the desktop goes away after the backup disk is stopped.
Note
You may have to wait several minutes for the backup disk to stop. Please be patient. If the backup disk does not stop and it appears to hang, it could be because an application or other process is accessing the backup disk in the background. If this is the case, attempt to eject the disk using Finder.
3. Select Delete from the action menu next to the Backup Disk Size.
Restoring Files from Backup
Restoring your Mac from a failed hard drive scenario involves the following steps.
1. Install the new hard drive.
2. Install Mac OS X 10.5 from the Mac OS X Install Disc.
3. Install Mac OS X operating system updates, to ensure everything is up-to-date.
4. Install HP MediaSmart Server Mac Client software. See Installing and Uninstalling the Mac
.
5. Configure HP MediaSmart Server Mac Client settings including: server name, administrator password, backup location (using the same share that was used for the backup) and start the backup disk.
6. Choose the disk called Backup to the HP MediaSmart Server disk in .Time Machine System
Preferences.
7. Launch Time Machine and ask to restore to the latest backup.
135
Chapter 6.
Online Backup
S
ERVER
O
NLINE
B
ACKUP
F
EATURES
Online Backup uses an Amazon S3™ account to save your important files to a remote location on the Internet. You can also browse and restore your online files back to your Server. This feature is an Add-in that you can uninstall at any time.
B
EFORE
U
SING
S
ERVER
O
NLINE
B
ACKUP
Before using this feature, you must first get an Amazon S3™ account. When you have an Amazon
S3™ account, you can use your Amazon credentials to configure the Online Backup feature. To
get an Amazon S3™ account, go to the Account Setup tab in the Server Online Backup section
of the Windows Home Server Settings window.
S
ERVER
O
NLINE
B
ACKUP
D
ASHBOARD
When you select Server Online Backup in the HP MediaSmart Server tab on the Windows Home
Server Console, the right pane offers you a portal to your Amazon S3™ account. This screen
,
Backup Status , and a Configure link that takes you to the
Account Setup . The figure below shows the Online Backup Dashboard before you have
configured Online Backup or scheduled any backups:
137
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Backup summary
Online backup summary shows the names and sizes of the folders currently stored in your
Amazon S3™ account. The figure below shows the Backup summary.
Backup Status
Backup Status shows information on the most recent backup only.
138
Online Backup
B
UTTON
B
AR
In the button bar of the Online Backup Dashboard, you can click these buttons:
,
.
Configure
Click on this button to bring up the Settings screen with focus on the Account Setup tab. Use this tab to specify the Amazon S3 account credentials to use for the backup
.
Schedule Backup
Clicking the Schedule Backup button opens the Windows Home Server Settings window at the
Scheduling tab. You can select shared folders and online backup schedule details here. The figure below shows this window.
139
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Backup Now
Click the Backup Now button to do an immediate online backup. The Backup window opens to show a list of shared folders on your HP MediaSmart Server. You can select any or all of these folders for backup. Check the box next to each folder you want to back up. The Select All and
Clear All buttons help you select or clear quickly. The Compute Size button opens to show you the size of your selected backup. Click the Backup button to start the transfer. You can see the
File Transfer Status in the Server Online Backup screen. The figure below shows the Backup window.
The figure below shows the Online Backup Dashboard after you have configured Online Backup and scheduled backup activity:
140
Online Backup
Browse/Restore
Click the Browse/Restore button to view your Amazon S3™ account and see the list of HP
MediaSmart Server shared folders that are already backed up. The Browse/Restore Backup window opens. In the left pane, select a folder to restore by checking the box. The right pane shows the files in your selected folder and information on File Name, File Size and File Path.
Note:
Be sure that files and folders in the selected folders are not open during restore. The restore cannot proceed if files are open.
The figure below shows the Browse/Restore Backup window.
141
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Delete
Brings up a window where you browse and chose to delete data backed up to your Amazon S3 account. Using the check boxes to select or unselect an item for deletion. You can select multiple items for deletion.
1. Click the Delete button.
2. A confirmation message box is shown that asks "Are you sure you want to permanently delete selected files/folders from Amazon S3?”, click OK to delete.
142
Online Backup
Once the deletion has been confirmed, the Delete Backup window closes and the Current
activity field in the Dashboard changes to reflect that a delete operation is in progress.
To stop the deletion, click the Stop Delete link in the Backup Status pane. The status of the delete operation is displayed in the Activity log pane. Once the selected files/folders are deleted, the
Backup Summary pane in the dashboard refreshes to display the up to date shares and sizes in
Amazon S3.
W
INDOWS
H
OME
S
ERVER
S
ETTINGS
Account Setup
Before you can set up your account, you must get an Amazon S3™ Account. The Account Setup tab lets you log into your existing Amazon S3™ account.
Once you have entered your Access and Secret Keys, click the Validate Keys button to validate the keys. The system validates the keys and reports if they are valid or not.
Your Bucket is how Amazon designates the location of your online backup. You can use a default name for your bucket or choose another name. The figure below shows the Account Setup tab.
143
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Scheduling
To schedule a backup, click the Scheduling tab. Here you can enable a backup, select shared folders , and schedule the start and end time of the backup window. The figure below shows the
Scheduling tab.
144
Online Backup
Restore
The restore tab allows you to keep the original restored file in the server or you can replace it with the file from Amazon. The figure below shows the Restore tab.
145
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
146
Chapter 7.
About Streaming Media
S
TREAMING
M
EDIA
Streaming media allows you to enjoy your videos, music, and photos in any room of your home and outside your home. Even when you are away from home, you can enjoy your media on any computer that has a Web browser .
S
TREAMING
M
EDIA
R
EQUIREMENTS
Before Streaming Media can work, you must:
• Store media on the HP MediaSmart Server
• Set up and enable Remote Access
• Set up Digital Media Receivers in your home
S
TREAMING
M
EDIA
T
YPES
Your HP MediaSmart Server can only stream media files such as music, photos, and videos. Nonmedia files are not available for streaming (Microsoft Word files, Spreadsheet files, etc).
P
UTTING
M
EDIA ON THE
HP M
EDIA
S
MART
S
ERVER
You can put media on your HP MediaSmart Server in two ways:
• Drag and drop media files to the folders on your Server
• Configure Media Collector to copy files to your Server
Media Collector scans the computers in your home network and copies media to the server. You can choose how often Media Collector copies files; and you can choose what Media Collector copies and how to organize media on the server.
S
TREAMING TO YOUR
T
ELEVISION
, S
TEREO
,
AND
H
OME
PC
Your HP MediaSmart Server uses Digital Media Servers to stream media from the Server to a
Digital Media Receiver that is attached to your television and stereo.
147
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
S
TREAMING TO A
R
EMOTE
C
OMPUTER
You can stream from the Internet using the HP Web Streamer application. When you are traveling, you can stream media from your HP MediaSmart Server to any computer that has a Web browser .
Your Server has a Digital Media Server called TwonkyMedia and a Web server. TwonkyMedia prepares your media for streaming and the Web server streams media to the Internet where your computer can play it on a Web browser.
S
TREAMING TO I
T
UNES
You can listen to the music files from your HP MediaSmart Server using iTunes. You cannot stream photos or videos to iTunes, only music files. iTunes can stream DRM-protected media.
148
Chapter 8.
Server for iTunes
S
ETTINGS FOR I
T
UNES
Media Collector provides the ability to copy your iTunes music library and playlists to your HP
MediaSmart Server. You can centralize your iTunes library for playback on any computer on your home network that runs iTunes.
Your Server is enabled for iTunes by default. To set up your Server for iTunes follow these steps:
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server.
3. In the left pane of the HP MediaSmart Server tab, click the Server for iTunes button. In the right pane click the Configure button. The Windows Home Server Settings window opens. Here you can set up the following:
• Status—enable or disable.
• Shared name—specify the shared name you want to display in iTunes.
• Require password—check to require password. The default setting here is no password. If you assign a password, then only users who provide the correct password can play music from your
Server's shared library.
• Check interval—how often to check for music that has been added to the shared Music folder on the server. By default this is set to check every 15 minutes.
5. Click OK to finish.
149
Chapter 9.
TwonkyMedia
S
TREAMING
M
EDIA
S
ERVERS
The HP MediaSmart Server includes three types of servers. These servers stream media from the
HP MediaSmart Server to your devices:
Web Server—Streams media to the Internet where you can access it from any computer that has a
Web browser
• Digital Media Servers—Your Server has two Digital Media Servers:
Packet Video’s TwonkyMedia—Prepares your media for the Web server to stream to the Internet and streams media to Digital Media Receivers ( DMR ) in your home. We strongly recommend that you use TwonkyMedia. TwonkyMedia is enabled by default in the HP MediaSmart Server.
TwonkyMedia can stream media to remote locations and it can stream most file types.
• Windows Media Connect—Streams to DMRs. Windows Media Connect cannot stream to a Web server. It cannot stream as many file types as TwonkyMedia and it is disabled by default in the HP MediaSmart Server.
• Server for iTunes—Streams to iTunes applications on the computers in your network. This server is included in your MediaSmart Server. It looks like a new device to your iTunes application, but it does not use one of your iTunes licenses.
The figure below shows how these servers take media from the disk on your HP MediaSmart
Server and stream it to your various receivers.
151
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
T
WONKY
M
EDIA
F
EATURES
We strongly recommend that you use TwonkyMedia as your Digital Media Server. TwonkyMedia is enabled by default in your MediaSmart server. TwonkyMedia includes these features:
Allows your digital media receiver ( DMR ) to see photo thumbnails for pictures and album artwork for music
Supports remote media streaming
• Supports more media formats than Windows Media Connect
Complies with the Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) protocol which allows support for more DMRs
File Compatibility for Local Streaming
The table below compares local streaming file compatibility between TwonkyMedia and Windows
Media Connect.
152
TwonkyMedia
TwonkyMedia and Windows Media Connect File Compatibility
File Types TwonkyMedia
Music Formats
Windows Media Connect
3gp Yes ac3 Yes aiff Yes asf Yes Yes
FLAC Yes
LPCM Yes m4a Yes mp1 Yes mp2 Yes mp3 Yes mp4 Yes mpa Yes ogg Yes wav Yes Yes wma Yes Yes
Picture Formats bmp Yes Yes gif Yes Yes jpg Yes Yes png Yes Yes tif, tiff Yes Yes
Video Formats
3gp Yes asf Yes
153
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
TwonkyMedia and Windows Media Connect File Compatibility
File Types TwonkyMedia Windows Media Connect avi Yes
DivX Yes
Yes dvr-ms Yes m1v Yes
Yes m4v Yes mpe Yes mpg/mpeg Yes Yes
MPEG-1 Yes Yes
MPEG-2 Yes
MPEG-2-T-S Yes
MPEG-4 Yes vdr Yes vob Yes wmv Yes Yes
Xvid Yes
Playlist Formats m3u Yes pla Yes
Yes wpl Yes Yes
T
WONKY
M
EDIA
D
EFAULT
S
ETTINGS
TwonkyMedia has these default settings in your HP MediaSmart Server:
Enables three folders for media streaming (You can add more. See below.):
• Music—music only (album art is displayed but is not shared as a picture)
• Photos—music, photos, and videos
154
TwonkyMedia
• Videos—videos only
• Gives all newly-detected DMRs access to your media
Note
You can change these default settings by clicking the TwonkyMedia button on the HP
MediaSmart Server tab of your Windows Home Server Console
UP
N
P A/V
AND
DLNA
Universal Plug and Play Audio Video ( UPnP A/V) and Digital Living Network Alliance (DLNA) define standard network protocols for streaming media.
• UPnP A/V is a set of network protocols that allow networked devices to communicate seamlessly in a home networking environment. The Digital Media Servers on your HP MediaSmart Server,
TwonkyMedia and Windows Media Connect, use UPnP/AV.
• DLNA is a set of standards (that includes UPnP A/V) for sharing media between devices.
TwonkyMedia is DLNA compliant. Windows Media Connect is not. This compliance allows
TwonkyMedia to work with more DMRs.
T
WONKY
M
EDIA AND
R
EMOTE
S
TREAMING
You can stream media to your laptop in the hotel room or to your friend’s computer in London.
TwonkyMedia takes media from the folders on your disk and streams this to the Web server. The
Web server streams your media files to the Internet where you can access them from any computer that has an Internet browser.
C
ONFIGURE
T
WONKY
M
EDIA FOR
S
TREAMING
M
EDIA
TwonkyMedia is enabled by default in your HP MediaSmart Server. To configure or change
TwonkyMedia settings, follow these steps:
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server.
3. In the left pane of the HP MediaSmart Server tab, click the TwonkyMedia button. The right pane shows current TwonkyMedia status for Shared Content, Media Sharing Folders, and Enabled
Media Receivers.
4. In the right pane, click Media Server Settings. The Windows Home Server Settings window opens. You can change settings here by using these tabs:
• Media Sharing Folders—Add, Edit, or Remove.
• Media Receivers—Add, Edit, or Remove. Check Automatic Sharing here to enable sharing for new media receivers automatically.
• Maintenance—Rebuild the database, and Reset to Default all media server settings.
Create and View Log Files for debugging purposes. And you can change the default Web server port.
155
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
5. Click OK to finish.
156
Chapter 10.
Media Collector
A
BOUT
HP M
EDIA
C
OLLECTOR
HP Media Collector takes media files from the computers on your network and copies them to your HP MediaSmart Server. This allows you to maintain a comprehensive library of music, photos, and videos in one location in your home. You can stream media to your television and stereo. You can share music with iTunes applications on other computers in your network. You can even stream media to the Internet where any computer with a Web browser can play it.
Note
Media Collector copies only media files. It does not collect other file types, such as Microsoft
Office documents.
Media Collection
HP Media Collector scans your computers for music, image, and video files and it copies them to the Server. You can choose how, where, and when Media Collector gathers your media. For example:
• You can tell Media Collector to look for videos in all folders or only in your My Videos folders.
• You can tell Media Collector to look for music and not to look for photos and video.
• You can tell Media Collector to gather photos from your computer and not from your children’s computers.
Schedule
Media Collector scans the computers in your network on an automatic schedule that you choose.
After you enable media collection and set the schedule, Media Collector collects new media files when you add them to your computers.
Media Collection Order
When all media types are enabled for collection, Media Collector collects photo files first; then music files, and it takes video files last.
HP Media Collector Default Settings
Media Collector is disabled by default. Before Media Collector can begin to copy media to your
HP MediaSmart Server, you must enable the media types you want to collect.
Media Collector copies media files only from computers that are installed as clients on your
Windows Home Server network. For example, if you have a computer that you use only for gaming and you have not made it part of your Windows Home Server network, this computer is not available for Media Collection.
157
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Organization Options and Defaults
You can tell HP Media Collector how you want to organize your media on your HP MediaSmart
Server. For example, you can organize media in these ways:
Photos
• By date taken, or existing file structure
• Default is existing file structure
Music
• By Artist/Album or existing file structure
• Default is Artist/Album
Videos
• By existing file structure
Ignored Directories and Skipped Files
HP Media Collector skips picture files that are less than 45 K in size. Media Collector ignores some directories for each media. See the list below:
Photos temporary internet files, My Music folder, windows system directories
Music temporary internet files, windows system directories
Videos temporary internet files, windows system directories, mov files located under My Pictures,
Pictures
Supported File Formats
The files and types listed below are compatible for Media Collection:
Photos jpg, gif, tif, pct, mov files located under My Pictures, Pictures
Music mp3, wma, m4a, aac, wav, playlists (m3u, wpl), album art
Videos
AVI, MOV, m4v, MPEG, MP2, WMV, FLV, DIVX, DVR-MS, M2TS, VOB file collections
158
Media Collector
Media File Duplication
Note
When HP Media Collector copies media files from all your computers and users, it attempts to reduce duplicates. For example, if two users have the same media file, Media
Collector copies only one file to the Server.
C
ONFIGURING
M
EDIA
C
OLLECTOR
Configuring Media Collector General Settings
Before You Configure HP Media Collector
Important
We strongly recommend that you enable the Guest account and give the Guest account full permission on all your photos, music, and videos shared folders ; this ensures that Media Collector always has access to all shares.
The first time that you open the Media Collector tab in the Windows Home Server Settings window, all your computers are listed in the Included computers box. When you add a new computer, it shows up in the Available Computers list. To add the new computer to Media
Collector’s scan schedule, simply move it to the Included computers box.
When enabled, Media Collector automatically scans the Included computers for media. Media
Collector does not scan computers in the Available computers box. You can move a computer out of the Included computers box and into Available computers if you want to disable media collection for that computer.
Configure HP Media Collector General Settings
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. In the HP MediaSmart Server tab, click the HP Media Collector button.
159
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
3. In the right pane, click Media Collector Settings.
The Windows Home Server Settings window opens. You can configure Media Collector General settings here.
4. Select general Media Collector settings.
• Scan Interval—set how often the Media Collector scans your computers
• Scanned Computers—Add or Remove computers from the Included list. (Available computers are Windows Home Server clients. Included Computers are scanned for media collection.)
160
Media Collector
Configuring Media Collector for Photos
1. In the Windows Home Server Settings window, click on Media Collector in the left pane.
2. Click the Photos tab to configure Photos collection. You can configure these settings in this tab:
• Photo Collection Status—Enable or Disable photo collection
• Photo Source—My Pictures folders or All Folders
Note
If you select All folders, Media Collector may collect graphics and images from your computer that are not a part of your photo collection, such as graphics associated with software applications.
• Photo Organization—Organize by date or by PC folder structure
161
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Example of Photos Collected by Date and by PC Folder Structure
First of all, it’s helpful to understand the underlying data used to build the two examples below.
In this case, the files that are being shown are based on two groups of photos. One group is located under user Susan’s home Pictures folder, with a number of uploaded photos and a single named photo (Beach_sunrise.jpg). This group of photos could be on any particular computer in the network (or even split across two computers). The second group of photos is on a particular computer (LaptopDad), but not under a user’s home Pictures folder. In this case, it’s under
D:\Photo Collection\... Also, note that all of the photos on LaptopDad are organized and named with meaningful names, including a copy of the Beach_sunrise.jpg file that also exists on Susan's group of files.
The photo example shows two panes with different file/folder organizations for the same group of sample photos.
162
Media Collector
Organize by Date
Things to Consider
Uses Date Picture Taken tag or Modified Date to organize files
Good for organizing large groups of unsorted image files
Reduces duplication of photos
Organize by PC Folder Structure
Sorts files by user or source computer
Good for maintaining original photo sorting
On the left, the files are organized by date
There are two things of interest
1. The photos from the two groups are now grouped together based on date, and
2. The one photo that was duplicated between the two groups is only present once.
The single grouping is what the Organize by Date option accomplishes – it uses the Date Picture
Taken tag within the file to place the photos by date. If this is not set, the system will use the file property Modified Date to place the photo. Be aware that this model ignores your folder structure, so it’s most useful in the case where you don’t have a meaningful folder structure (e.g. unsorted groups of folders or groups based on the camera software’s defaults). Regarding the duplicate file, only one copy is kept as shown in the example. If two duplicate files are different, the newest one is retained on the server.
163
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
In contrast, the right pane is organized by PC folder structure
If photos are found under a user’s home Pictures folder, then they will be grouped just under the user’s name with the underlying folder organization. This still may include some simplification in that photos for user Susan on computer1 and user Susan on computer2 will be coalesced into a single group. This may result in some duplicate photos being represented once.
On the other hand, if the photos were found on a computer in a folder other than a user’s home
Pictures folder, they will be grouped under the computer name, with a path showing their placement on the computer. In general, the “by folder” organization is most helpful if you have already organized your photos and don't want to lose your folder structure.
Configuring Media Collector for Music
To Configure Media Collector for Music, follow the steps below:
1. In the Windows Home Server Settings window, click on Media Collector in the left pane.
2. Click the Music tab to configure Music collection. You can configure these settings in this tab:
• Music Collection Status—Enable or Disable music collection
• Music Source—My Music folders, iTunes libraries, Windows Media Player libraries, or
All Folders
Note
If you select All folders, Media Collector may collect sound files from your computer that are not a part of your music collection, such as sound files that are associated with software applications.
• Music Organization—Organize by Artist/Album or by PC folder structure
164
Media Collector
Example of Music Collected by Artist/Album and by PC Folder
Structure
We’ll start by looking at the underlying data used to build the two examples below. The files that are shown are based on two music collections. One group is located under user Susan’s home
Music folder, with some songs organized by album as well as some that are included within her iTunes library. This music could be on any particular computer in the network, or even split across two computers. The second group of music files is on a particular computer (LaptopDad), but not under a user’s home Music folder. In this case, it’s under D:\Misc Music\... Notice that these files are not organized by album name and they include a duplicate song (U2’s Bullet the
Blue Sky).
The music example shows two panes with different file/folder organizations for the same group of music files.
165
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Organize by Artist/Album
Uses music file tags to organize files
Reduces duplication of files on the server
Things to Consider
Organize by PC Folder Structure
Sorts files by user or source computer
Good for maintaining original music sorting
On the left, the files are organized by Artist/Album
There are two things of interest
1. The two groups of music files are now organized uniformly, and
2. The one song that was duplicated between the two groups is only present once.
The uniform organization is what the Organize by Artist/Album option accomplishes – it uses the Album and Artist tags within the file to place the files. If a music file doesn’t have both of these tags set, it will be placed based on its location on the user’s computer. This organizational approach is useful for organizing multiple music collections into a single collection and reducing file duplication. This means that browsing the server music share for music streaming will be more streamlined without duplicate file entries. The example illustrates duplicate file handling by pointing out the single file entry on the left pane that was duplicated on the right. If the two duplicate files are different, the newest one is retained on the server.
In contrast, the right pane is organized by PC folder structure
If music is found under a user’s home Music folder, it will be grouped under the user’s name with the underlying folder organization. This still may include some simplification in that music for user Susan on computer1 and user Susan on computer2 will be coalesced into a single group. This may result in some duplicate songs being represented once.
166
Media Collector
On the other hand, if the music was found on a computer in a folder other than your home Music folder, it will be grouped under the computer name, with a path showing their placement on the computer. This type of organization is most helpful if you have organized your music in a special way and doesn’t want to lose this folder structure or if multiple users have different quality versions of the music and you want to maintain the multiple copies of songs.
Configure Media Collector for Videos
To configure Media Collector for Videos, follow the steps below:
1. In the Windows Home Server Settings Window, click Media Collector in the left pane.
2. Click the Videos tab to configure Video collection. You can configure these settings in this tab:
• Video Collection Status—Enable or Disable photo collection
• Video Source—My Pictures folders or All Folders
Note
If you select All folders, Media Collector may collect video files from your computer that are not a part of your video collection, such as videos that are associated with software applications.
78
167
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
M
EDIA
C
OLLECTION
S
TATUS
Using the Media Collector Server Status
By default, the HP Media Collector pane of the HP MediaSmart Server tab in the Windows Home
Server Console has information about the Media Collector along with a Media Collector Status link. After the feature has been configured, the pane shifts to display status information about the
Media Collector.
The information in the Windows Home Server Console relates to the Client Media Collector
Status Tool but there are some differences. The status on the server is largely based on client status files being copied to the server. This means that if there is a connectivity problem between the client and the server, then no status information about that client is available.
The status page displays a line for each computer in the home network that the server knows about. Computers may be missing if they are Macs and/or if they do not have MediaSmart Server software installed on them. For each computer listed, a status is listed.
Another important concept is that media collection executes on a per computer and per user basis.
So, if one computer in the home network has a single user while a second computer has two users, the second computer’s status will be a composite value based on the different per user status values for that client. In any case, users should expect to see status values such as the following.
168
Media Collector
Status
Not included
No status available
Media collection issue
Media collection in progress
Media partially collected
Server Media Collection Status
Description
Indicates that the computer has not been configured for media collection.
Indicates that the computer has been configured for media collection, but no status information has been transferred to the server.
If the computer was just added to the included list or if media collection was just enabled, then No status available is normal because media collection takes some time to start.
If 30 minutes has gone by since the configuration changes and the status is unchanged, even after clicking Refresh, then check the computer for more information. First of all, verify that a user is logged into the computer because the media collection needs to run as part of a user’s computer environment.
Otherwise, check the Media Collector Status Tool on the computer for more details.
This error can occur if the client software and the server software versions are not compatible. For other errors, the media collector software on the client should not
be able to connect to the server to share its status. See Updating and Rolling Back the Server
and Updating and Rolling Back Client PCs
for additional information.
Indicates that media collection is currently underway for at least one user on this computer.
Indicates that the media collection started but may have lost network connectivity with the server before completing.
Media collection occurs at a schedule roughly determined by the collection
interval in the Media Collector General Settings
. If you are concerned that too much time has passed without another collection starting, check the Media
Collector Status Tool on the computer for more details.
Indicates that media has been successfully collected from this computer for at least one user.
Media successfully collected
Viewing Computer Details
If the status line is anything other than Not included or No status available, you can open the line for more details by selecting the line and clicking View Details or by double-clicking on the line.
This opens the View Collection Details dialog, which shows information about the most recent media collection activities for the computer on a per user basis.
169
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Each line in the list represents media collection results for a given user. This only shows attempted media collection results: if user A has not logged into the computer, then the media collection software is never run for user A and no entry for user A will be seen here. The status line indicates the date that media collection was performed, a status value, and statistics about the different kinds of media files collected. The expected status values are:
• Media collection in progress
• Media partially collected
• Media successfully collected
• Media collection issue
The meanings of these status values are explained above.
The media collection counts show how many files of each type were collected in the last collection attempt. These numbers are not cumulative historical information. They only apply to the most recent media collection. A particular media type may indicate “Not enabled”, which means that it’s not configured for collection. Click Refresh to update the details dialog, which is mainly of interest for the case where collection is in progress. The bottom half of the display offers the user opportunities to change the configuration and access help topics.
Using the Client Media Collector Status Tool
The Media Collector Status Tool displays information about the most recent media collection for the computer you are sitting at. It does not display cumulative media collection history. To view the status of a different computer, you must go to that computer and open the Media Collector
Status Tool.
This dialog can provide helpful information about the client computer if there was a problem during the last media collection.
To open the Media Collection Status Tool
170
Media Collector
1. At the computer, select Start, All Programs, and then HP MediaSmart Server.
2. Click Media Collector Status.
This help topic describes the following tabs:
•
•
Status Information
The Status Information tab displays feedback about the user's most recent run of the Media
Collection client software. The different status values and descriptions of the related information are listed below. An example of each state is also provided.
Client Media Collection Status
Status
In Progress
Successful
Partial Success
Error
Description
• Status—Media collection in progress
• Messages—Displays the date and time that the media collection started and the number of files that have been collected so far.
• Details—Shows the counts for each media file type collected at the given time. Details may update to show the counts changing over time.
• Status—Media successfully collected
• Messages—Displays any messages, such as file counts, written to the log during the media collection.
• Details—Shows the counts for each media file type collected in the last run.
• Status—Media partially collected
• Messages—Displays any messages written during the media collection.
Messages include file counts and, most probably, a lost connection to server message.
• Details—Shows the counts for counts for each media file type collected in the last run up until the client lost connection with the server.
• Last Successful Run—Displays the last date and time that the media collection succeeded. If the media collection was never successful, this
section says "Media never successfully collected." See Media Collector Error
for additional information.
• Status—Media collection issue
• Messages—Identifies the error. See
Media Collector Error Messages
for additional information.
• Last Successful Run—Indicates when the media collection last succeeded. If the media collection was never successful, this section says "Media never successfully collected."
171
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Example 1: Media collection in progress Example 2: Media successfully collected
Example 3: Media partially collected Example 4: Media collection issue
Connectivity Test
The connectivity test pane is a troubleshooting tool that helps you investigate issues connecting to their server. Use this pane if you get the Media Collector did not have read/write access to the
server error or if you get a lost connection error. Click Test Connection to attempt to write and read to each of the media shares on the server. The display area reports the results of these tests.
172
Media Collector
No shares are accessible.
• If the tests show that none of the shares are accessible, it is most likely because authentication is not set up correctly. Verify that either the guest account is enabled with full access to all the media shares or that the user name and password match for the user on this computer and on the server (and also that the server user has full access to the media shares). For additional
information, see User Accounts .
• Another possibility is that the server is not available. Attempt to connect to the server by opening the Windows Home Server Console to verify that the server is reachable from this computer. For
additional information, see Opening the Windows Home Server Console
.
One share is not accessible.
If the tests show that a single share is not accessible, the user permissions not set up correctly.
Verify that the matching user on the server has full access to the media shares or, if there is no matching user, that the guest account has full access to the media shares. For additional information, see Viewing Shared Folder Properties.
Media Collector Error Messages
The following errors may display on the Media Collector Status Tool's Status tab during media collection.
Media Collection Errors
Error
The Media Collector could not find the server name in the registry
Description
This indicates an install problem with the client software
Possible Solutions
Installing the Software on the
173
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Error
This computer is not configured for media collection
No data types are configured for media collection
Media Collection Errors
Description
Change the configuration in the Windows Home Server
Console to include this computer.
Change the configuration in the Windows Home Server
Console to enable at least one media type.
Possible Solutions
Uninstall the Client Software and Reinstall it
Configuring Media Collection for Photos
Configuring Media Collection for Music
Configuring Media Collection for Videos
Viewing Shared Folder
Properties
Media Collector did not have read/write access to the server
Make sure that either 1) the user name/password match for this user on this computer and the server or 2) the guest account is enabled on the server with full access permission for the Photo,
Music, and Video shares.
Media Collector is stopping because the server is reorganizing media data
Media Collector could not create a scheduled task to run regularly
Upgrade the HP MediaSmart server software to version
<x>
This problem will solve itself once the server finishes reorganizing the media files.
File reorganization results from the user changing the configuration of the photo and/or music organization.
This usually indicates an install problem that requires support help. The user needs to manually delete the scheduled task, then log out and back in.
This happens if the HP Media
Collector software version is out of sync with the HP
MediaSmart Server.
No action required.
See your Warranty and
Support Guide for HP
Support phone numbers in your country.
Updating and Rolling Back the Server
174
Error
Media partially collected
Media Collector
Media Collection Errors
Description
Partial collection is the result of a lost connection during the collection process. This may indicate a real error such as a server crash or a problem with the home network but, more likely, it can occur during a very large collection when the server hits its normal sleep time. It is recommended that you disable server sleep until after a “break in” period to initially collect the media in the household. This may require a few days for large collections of files.
Possible Solutions
Connectivity Test
Power
Media Collection System Tray Messages
For the most part, you will be informed about media collection problems through either the
Windows Home Server Console or the Media Collector Status Tool on your computer. In addition to those, if the Media Collector software version is out of sync with the HP MediaSmart Server, you will see a system tray notification. The MediaSmart Server software must be the same version on both the server and your PC to be compatible. So, if the server software is at 2.5 and the Media Collector software is at version 2.1, the server will send out this notification. If the server software is at 2.1 and the Media Collector software is at version 2.5, the Media Collector will generate this system tray message. The message will say something like: Upgrade the HP
MediaSmart server software to version <Version number> on <system name>.
To fix this, either upgrade the 2.1 component or rollback the 2.5 component. To change the Media
Collector software, the HP MediaSmart Server software and the Windows Home Server
Connector software on your computer must be uninstalled and reinstalled from the server.
Changing the server software involves either accessing the Update feature from the Windows
Home Server Console or rolling back the server version.
175
Chapter 11.
HP Video Converter
A
BOUT
HP V
IDEO
C
ONVERTER
The video converter monitors selected shared folders and attempts to perform video conversion
(also known as transcoding) on files with common video file formats. The video converter also supports DVD file system conversion, for DVD files that are commonly used in camcorders.
Advanced DVD processing like title and audio track selection is not provided, as these types of features are not common on consumer camcorders and are usually only encountered in commercial DVDs which contain copy protection.
The results of the video converter tool are of a single file format: an MPEG-4 video file using an
H.264 video codec and AAC stereo audio codec. You should check device documentation for support of this video format. At the time of this writing, devices supporting this format include: o Microsoft Xbox 360 o Sony PlayStation 3 o Sony PlayStation Portable o Apple iPod (newer iPods with video support) o Apple iPhone o Microsoft Zune
Note
The Video Converter will not transcode copy protected DVDs or electronic videos with Digital
Rights Management (DRM) protection.
Converted Video Resolution
When selecting a shared folder to perform video conversion on, there are two options for the output of the video converter: Full resolution and Mobile resolution.
Full Resolution
Full resolution keeps the source video’s screen resolution, and basically just creates an output file with the new format for the provided input. Video and audio quality should be very similar to the source material for Full resolution videos. You may notice some differences between the original and Full resolution output, but these differences are minimal in most situations.
Mobile Resolution
The Mobile resolution creates a video that is suitable for mobile devices and remote video streaming (the video will be no larger than QVGA: 320w x 240h). This is to make support of mobile devices easier, and to provide videos suitable for remote media streaming . For more
information, see About Media Streamer .
177
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Network Bandwidth
One benefit of using the Full resolution output settings is that older video formats like MPEG-2 videos are often much larger in size than the format used by the video converter. The output of a
Full resolution video conversion can be approximately 25% the file size of an original DVD
(MPEG-2). This significant reduction in size can make streaming via 802.11G less problematic
(although many factors impact streaming videos wirelessly, results may vary widely).
When considering remotely streamed video content (using a Windows Home Server with Remote
Access Enabled), Full resolution videos will be difficult to stream remotely on many broadband connections. HP recommends using the Mobile resolution videos when streaming remotely for more success. These videos are very limited in resolution and visual fidelity, to provide a better chance for successfully accessing videos remotely. The Mobile resolution setting produces a video that is commonly supported for the mobile devices listed above. The Mobile resolution is also ideal for streaming playback on Internet connected PC's using the HP MediaSmart Streamer and on iPhones/iPod Touches using the HP MediaSmart server for iPhone application.
V
IDEO
C
ONVERSION
U
SE
C
ASE
S
CENARIOS
Basic/Default Video Conversion Scenario
If you have little to moderate video content you will find the basic default settings appropriate for video conversion. The basic settings require you to enable the video converter tool, and keep your videos in the Videos shared folder.
Advantages
The advantage of using the basic settings is that all video files in your Videos shared folder will attempt to be converted. Also, this scenario does not require any file organization changes or moving or copying files around.
Disadvantages
If you have a lot of content in your Videos shared folder, the basic settings can use a lot of additional disk space. Also, video conversion takes a lot of time and you may have to wait a long time for video conversion to complete. Lastly, if you have a lot of videos that are already in a highly compressed format (such as DivX, Xvid, or H.264); then converting them again on the
“Full” output setting offers little value since these formats are very similar in storage efficiency.
Video Conversion Scenario – Alternative #1
You may find that converting all of your videos takes too much time and disk space. However, you may want to have all your videos available remotely. In such cases, it is recommended to enable Mobile quality only for the Videos shared folder. To save disk space, you can create a new shared folder (called something like “full-res videos”) and enable full resolution conversion only on this folder. When there are videos that should be converted at full resolution, those files can be copied or moved into this new shared folder. After conversion is complete, the original files should be moved back to the original location in the videos folder (to make sure they are still available for local network streaming).
178
HP Video Converter
Advantages
This method provides a balance for making all the video files (or at least those in the Videos shared folder) available to mobile devices, but also offers control to limit the amount of full resolution videos converted.
Disadvantages
This method requires you to move/copy videos back and forth around their server. This can be error prone and also consume too much disk space. Users should be very familiar with the file and folder layout before attempting to work with this type of approach.
Video Conversion Scenario – Alternative #2
You may find converting any of your videos automatically to be troublesome. However, you may want to convert a selected portion of your videos. In such cases, it is recommended to disable conversion for all formats for the Videos shared folder. You can then create new shared folders to enable conversion for only the videos you place in this folder in the output resolution you want.
This gives you the ability to selectively convert only a few videos, or even videos in a certain order, to specific output formats selected.
Advantages
Along with the extra input and output control, this alternative offers the greatest potential benefit for disk space utilization.
Disadvantages
This method shares the same issues as alternative #1, except twice as complicated. Now you will have to manage videos in multiple places for mobile, full, or both conversion settings. You should be very familiar with your folder layout and how this works with media streaming servers before attempting this approach.
A
UTOMATING
V
IDEO
C
ONVERSION
If you have little to moderate video content you will find the basic default settings appropriate for video conversion. The basic settings require you to enable the video converter tool, and keep your videos in the Videos shared folder.
Advantages
The advantage of using the basic settings is that all video files in your Videos shared folder will attempt to be converted. Also, this scenario does not require any file organization changes or moving or copying files around.
Disadvantages
If you have a lot of content in your videos shared folder, the basic settings can use a lot of additional disk space. Also, video conversion takes a lot of time and you may have to wait a long time for video conversion to complete. Lastly, if you have a lot of videos that are already in a highly compressed format (such as DivX, Xvid, or H.264); then converting them again on the Full output setting offers little value since these formats are very similar in storage efficiency.
179
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
How to Configure
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. Enable the Guest account or create user accounts on your server.
Enabling the guest account or creating user accounts gives your network computers a way to
authenticate with the server. See Enable Guest Account and Set up User Accounts .
3. Configure Media Collector to copy all videos on your network computers to the videos shared folder.
See Configuring Media Collector General Settings and
Configuring Media Collector for Videos
.
Alternately, you can skip Steps 1 and 2 and manually move or copy video files you want to convert to the videos shared folder on the server. The videos shared folder is at \\hpserver\videos.
4. To enable the HP Video Converter, click Settings and select Video Converter in the left menu.
5. Check Enable Video Converter.
Depending on the number of videos you are converting and their size, the HP Video Converter may take a very long time to convert files.
6. Check Full or Mobile for each folder you want to convert videos.
If you are using Media Collector, all of the videos will be in the videos shared folder. If you check
Full and Mobile, you will have three files on your server: the original video file, the converted Full resolution file, and the converted Mobile resolution file. Think about the required disk space when selecting folders and resolution quality.
180
HP Video Converter
• Full—Keeps the source video’s screen resolution and converts the file format to an
MPEG-4 video file using an H.264 video codec and AAC stereo audio codec.
• Mobile—Creates a video that is suitable for mobile devices and remote video streaming
(the video will be no larger than QVGA: 320w x 240h).
7. Click Apply.
Unsupported video formats, copy protected DVD content, and DRM protected videos will not be converted. Full and Mobile converted video files are placed on your server at
\\hpserver\converted videos.
G
IVING
U
SERS
A
CCESS TO THE
C
ONVERTED
V
IDEOS
F
OLDER
You may want to give people on your home network access to the Converted Videos folder so they can see what is in the folder or so they can add, delete, or change videos from the folder. By default, users have no access to the Converted Videos folder. Users that do not have access to the
Converted Videos folder are still able to stream content from the folder.
Complete the following steps to change user permissions.
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. Click the User Accounts tab at the top of the page. If the User Accounts Setup dialog displays click OK.
3. Double-click a user account to open the Properties dialog.
4. Select the Shared Folder Access tab.
5. Select an access level for the user—Full, Read, or None.
• Full—The user will be able to create, change, or delete any files in the folder.
• Read—The user will only be able to read files in the folder. They cannot create, change, or delete files in the folder.
• None—The user will not be able to access any files in the folder.
181
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
6. Click OK.
E
NABLING
C
ONVERTED
V
IDEOS FOR
T
WONKY
M
EDIA
The Converted Videos folder is enabled for TwonkyMedia by default. If you uninstall the
TwonkyMedia add-in and reinstall it, the Converted Videos folder is disabled. If this happens, your mobile devices and in-house media streaming will not see the converted videos. Complete the following steps to enable the Converted Videos folder for TwonkyMedia.
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. In the left pane of the HP MediaSmart Server tab, click the TwonkyMedia button.
The right pane shows current TwonkyMedia status for Shared Content, Media Sharing Folders, and Enabled Media Receivers.
3. If Converted Videos is not listed under Media Sharing Folders, click Media Server Settings.
182
HP Video Converter
4. In the Windows Home Server Settings, double-click Converted Videos to enable it to make it green.
If Converted Videos is not in the list, click Add to restore it to the list.
183
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
C
ONVERTING
N
ON
-C
OPY
P
ROTECTED
DVD
S
Video content is becoming more and more popular, whether you're recording your last vacation or creating a YouTube video. If you used software to create a DVD of your project, you can use the
HP Video Converter to transcode the DVD into a format suitable to streaming to many devices in the home or mobile devices.
1. Insert the DVD in your computer's DVD-ROM drive.
2. Navigate to a folder on your server that is enabled for video conversion.
This is typically your videos shared folder at \\hpserver\videos. If you changed the name of your server during the installation the path will be different. Navigate to \\<server name>\videos.
3. Create a folder for the DVD content.
4. Navigate to the DVD-ROM in Windows Explorer and copy the Video_TS folder to the folder you created on your server.
In the example, the full path on the server is \\hpserver\videos\MyDVD\Video_TS.
184
HP Video Converter
5. When the HP Video Converter scans the videos shared folder it will transcode the DVD content and put it in a subfolder within \\hpserver\converted videos.
The DVD may have multiple titles or chapters. All of these files are appended to one another during video conversion to produce a single output file. For this reason, converted DVDs will not retain any title or chapter information.
S
UPPORTED
V
IDEO
F
ORMATS
The following table lists several popular video formats supported by the Video Converter. This list is not comprehensive. For a comprehensive list, see http://www.hp.com/support . A list of unsupported formats is also included.
Supported Video Formats
Container Video Audio
AVI DivX (4,5,6)
AVI XviD
AVI XviD aac mp3 aac
WMV WMV, WMA
MPG MPEG-1, MPEG-2 mp2, PCM, AC3
AVI MJPEG
VOB MPEG-2
MOV
MP4, M4V
MJPEG-A , B
MPEG-4
DVR-MS MPEG-2
AC3, ADPCM, PCM
PCM
AAC
AC3
185
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Unsupported Video Formats
Video Container Audio
AAC
WTV MPEG-1, 2, 4; WMV,
VC1
AVC (h264) MOV AAC and others
Multiple other containers
AVC (h264)
MKV AVC
MTS
No Support for ISO
AVC (h264)
To determine if your video is compatible with Video Converter, check the following
• Check to see if the video file extension matches one of those listed in the Containers column. If it matches, it is likely that the video is compatible with Video Converter. However, if the embedded video or audio is an unsupported format, the file will not convert.
• See the documentation that came with the software or device that you used to create the video.
• Try converting a single test video using Video Converter.
V
IDEO
C
ONVERSION
F
AILS
1. To view the status of video conversion, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray and log on.
2. Click Video Converter on the left side of the Console.
3. Check Show All Converted Videos.
186
HP Video Converter
4. Click the Status column header to sort and group all Failed videos conversions together.
5. Examine the failed video conversions to determine the reason they failed.
• Copy protected DVD—The HP Video Converter will not transcode copy protected
DVDs.
DRM protected content—The HP Video Converter will not transcode electronic videos with
Digital Rights Management (DRM) protection.
• Unsupported video format—The original video format is unsupported by the HP Video
Converter.
• Media Collector files—If you copy videos to the server using Media Collector, the HP
Video Converter may start transcoding videos before they are completely copied to the server. If this happens, the video conversion will fail. Select the video in the Converter
Status list and click Re-Convert to attempt to transcode the video again. See
Automating Video Conversion for more information on using Media Collector to copy
videos to the server.
187
Chapter 12.
Media Streamer
A
BOUT
M
EDIA
S
TREAMER
Media Streamer is a Web application. To access Media Streamer, open a Web browser and type your personal URL address in the address bar. An example URL is: smithfamily.HPhome.com.
The browser goes to the Windows Homer Server home page. When you click on the Media
Streamer icon, this takes you to the Log on screen. Here you can enter your HP MediaSmart
Server user account name and password.
This takes you to the Media Streamer application. Media Streamer opens at the Music page,
Artists View.
M
EDIA
S
TREAMER
P
AGES
The Media Streamer application has two pages: Music and Photos. Each page has different views for browsing your media.
Format Compatibility
The files and types listed below are compatible for Media Streaming :
Audio Formats
MP3, AAC-LC, PCM
Compatibility for Audio
.wma, .mp3, .m4a, .mp4, .aac, .wav
Compatibility for Photo
.jpg, .tif, .tiff, .png, .gif, .bmp
HP MediaSmart Server Requirements
Before you can run Media Streamer you must:
Install Flash 9 plugin for the Web browser on your computer
• Turn on Windows Media Sharing
•
Configure TwonkyMedia for Streaming Media on your HP MediaSmart Server
• Configure Remote Access on your Server
189
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
M
USIC
P
AGE
The music page has four views: Album View ,
. To change views, click the Album, Artists, Playlists, or Folders button.
M
USIC
P
AGE
—A
LBUM
V
IEW
.
The Album view on the Music page has two selection panels (Album and Tracks) and a media
Player. The blue background shows the item selected in each panel.
Selection Bar
The album panel shows a list of the albums available on the server sorted alphabetically by album title. When you select and album, the tracks for that album appear in the tracks panel. You can jump to a different album in the list by typing the first letter of an album.
In the Tracks panel, Tracks sort by track order. Again You can jump to a different section of each column by typing the first letter of any Title, Artist, or Album.
190
Media Streamer
M
USIC
P
AGE
—A
RTISTS
V
IEW
The Artists view on the Music page has three selection panels (Artists, Albums, Tracks) and a media Player.
– All – The Artists and Albums panels have an – All – item at the top. This allows you to select all artists or albums and this option always stays on screen.
Selection Bar
This blue bar shows the item selected in each panel.
The figure below shows the Music Page—Artist View
Selection Panel Behavior
In the Artists and Albums panels, names sort alphabetically.
– All –– The Artists and Albums panels have an – All – item.
• Selecting – All – in the artists panel will list all albums in the albums panel.
• Selecting –All – in the albums panel will list the tracks from all albums by that artist in the tracks panel.
• In the Tracks panel, Tracks sorts by song title.
191
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• The Albums column shows the number of albums for – All – and for each artist. The Tracks column shows the number of tracks for – All – and for each artist.
When you select an artist, the albums for that artist appear in the Albums panel.
When you select a single album, the tracks for the selected album appear in the tracks panel sorted by song title.
M
USIC
P
AGE
—F
OLDERS
V
IEW
The Folders View of the Music page has two selection panels and a media player.
The top selection panel shows folders in a typical file browser view sorted in alphabetical order.
Tracks Panel
The tracks panel shows tracks sorted by track number.
Note
Music tracks in sub folders are not included in the Tracks panel list.
Selection Bar
This blue bar shows the item selected in each panel.
192
Media Streamer
M
USIC
P
AGE
—P
LAYLISTS
V
IEW
The Playlists View has two selection panels and a media player.
There are three pre-defined playlists: -Last played- , -Most played-, and Recently added. And the user’s personal playlists are listed below
Tracks from the selected playlist display in the Tracks panel. Playlist tracks sort in playlist order.
Note
Playlists display up to 500 songs.
Selection Bar
This blue bar shows the item selected in each panel. When you open Media Streamer the Selection
Bar highlights what you last selected.
M
USIC
P
AGE
—M
EDIA
P
LAYER
From the top down, the Player shows these features:
193
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• Player window shows album art (if available)
• Blue Display area – shows artist on top line, album in the middle line, track name on the bottom line. Below the Text the progress bar shows the amount of time played. Names that are too wide to fully display in the player can be read in a tool tip by hovering the mouse over desired name.
• Progress Bar –Click the progress bar at the place you want to play or slide the arrow to the desired time.
• Song progress text – shows the current position in time for the song and total song duration.
• Player Controls are in left to right order:
• Full Screen Toggle
• Shuffle Toggle – blue circle outline indicated shuffle is turned on
• Previous Track
• Play/Pause toggle
• Next track
• Repeat Toggle -- blue circle outline indicates repeat is turned on
• Below the player controls is the volume control slider bar. You can grab and move this to left and right or click the desired position on the slider bar.
M
USIC
P
AGE
—T
RACKS
P
ANEL
The columns: Length, Artist, Album, Composer, and Genre give information about each track and are sort-able by clicking the column header. Once the column is sorted, type the first letter of the value you are looking for, and the first track with a value in that column that matches will be selected, but not played. Repeating the key press will move the selection to the next value beginning with the letter typed.
Click the desired track with mouse and it will begin to play.
194
Media Streamer
N
O
M
USIC
T
O
S
TREAM
This dialog box will appear when you open Media Streaming and you click the Music button and you:
• Do not have music on your Server
or
•
You have not configured the server for streaming media .
N
O MUSIC ON YOUR
S
ERVER
Place music on your server in the following location "<name of server>/Music" and then
configure your server for streaming media .
P
HOTOS
P
AGE
The photos page has four views: the Date View
, and the
. To change views, click the Date, Folders, or Playlist button.
P
HOTOS
P
AGE
—D
ATE
V
IEW
The Photo Page, Date View has three selection panels and one media player.
The Year panel has a column showing years and a column showing the number of photos in that year.
The Month panel has a month column that shows the number of the month, only the months that have photos show up and a column showing the number of photos in that month and year.
The Photos panel displays thumbnails, if you hover over a thumbnail a tool tip will display the filename.
195
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Selection Bar
This blue bar shows the item selected in each panel.
– All – The Year and Month panels have an – All – item.
• Selecting - All - in the year panel will list all months in the month panel, each month entry includes the photos from that month for all years combined.
• Selecting – All – in the month panel will show all photos for the selected year in the photos panel.
Selecting a particular year in the year panel will load all months that contain images from that year.
Selecting on a particular month will load the thumbnails of all images for that month in the photos panel.
Selecting a photo thumbnail in the photos panel will load the image in the media player.
The figure below shows the Photos Page—Date View
P
HOTOS
P
AGE
—F
OLDER
V
IEW
The Photos Page, Folder View has two selection panels and one media player
The top selection panel shows folders in a typical file browser view.
196
Media Streamer
In the photos panel thumbnails of the images in the folder selected in the file browser view are displayed. Images in sub folders are not shown in the photo panel.
Selecting a photo thumbnail in the photos panel will load the image in the media player.
Selection Bar
This blue bar shows the item selected in each panel.
The figure below shows the Photos Page—Folder View
P
HOTOS
P
AGE
—P
LAYLIST
V
IEW
The Playlists View has two selection panels and a media player.
There are three pre-defined playlists: -Most played-, -Last played-, and -Recently Added-.
Photo thumbnails from the selected playlist display in the photos panel. Playlist photos sort in playlist order.
Note
Playlists display up to 500 photos.
Selection Bar
This blue bar shows the item selected in each panel.
197
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
The figure below shows the Photos Page—Playlist View
P
HOTOS
P
AGE
—F
ULL
S
CREEN
V
IEW
This view shows the picture in the full browser window . The player controls appear in a semitransparent gray bar in the bottom center of the picture. The controls will fade out after 3 seconds.
Moving the mouse in the photo viewer window will make the controls appear again.
The figure below shows the Photos Page—Full Screen View
198
Media Streamer
V
IDEOS
P
AGE
The Videos page has three views: the
,
.
NOTE:
To ensure that your videos can be streamed, videos should be processed through the HP Video
Converter, for more information see
assistance in setting up your Server.
The Navigation Bar also includes a
, and Help link.
V
IDEOS
P
AGE
– A
LL
V
IEW
The All view of the Videos page has one selection panel and the media player.
199
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
In the Videos panel, videos available for streaming are presented.
Selection Bar
This blue bar shows the item selected in each panel.
Selecting a video in the Videos Panel will start loading the video in the video player. You must then click the play button to start the video.
V
IDEOS
P
AGE
– F
OLDERS
V
IEW
The Folders view of the Videos page has two selection panels.
200
Media Streamer
The top selection panel shows folders in a typical file browser view. The lower panel lists videos for the selected folder.
Selection Bar
This blue bar shows the item selected in each panel.
Selecting a video in the Folder Panel lists the videos in that folder in the Videos Panel.
Selecting a video in the Videos Panel will start loading the video in the video player. You must then click the play button to start the video.
The figure below shows the Videos Page – Folders View
V
IDEOS
P
AGE
– P
LAYLISTS
V
IEW
The Playlists View has two selection panels and a media player.
There are three pre–defined playlists: – Most played–, –Last played–, and –Recently Added– which are displayed in the Playlist panel. The playlist panel also lists the number of videos in each playlist.
Videos from the selected playlist display in the videos panel. Playlist videos sort in playlist order.
201
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Selecting a video in the Videos Panel will start loading the video in the video player. You must then click the play button to start the video.
Note
Playlists display up to 500 videos.
V
IDEO
Q
UALITY
F
ILTER
By default the Video page will open with Converted Mobile videos.
You have three choices for Video Quality
• Converted – Mobile These Videos are suitable for mobile devices and remote video streaming
(the video will be no larger than QVGA: 320w x 240h). This is to make support of mobile devices easier, and to provide videos suitable for remote media streaming.
202
Media Streamer
• Converted – Full. Full resolution keeps the source video’s screen resolution, and basically just creates an output file with the new format for the provided input. Video and audio quality should be very similar to the source material for Full resolution videos. You may notice some differences between the original and Full resolution output, but these differences are minimal in most situations.
• All. Displays all videos in the shared folder.
S
TATUS LINK
Clicking the Status link will bring up a report that can tell you the status of your video
conversions. For more information see Automating Video Conversion
.
Clicking a file will give a more detailed explanation of its status. If the explanations disappear too soon, remove the check from the Auto-Fresh box.
Should the Converter Status be red (off), go to the Video Converter settings as detailed in
V
IDEOS
P
AGE
– V
IDEOS
P
ANEL
In the videos panel, videos sort alphabetically by name. There are three other columns. The Length columns shows length in minutes, the Size in mega-bytes, and the Format column shows video file formats, such as .mp4.
203
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
V
IDEOS
P
AGE
– P
LAYER
Player window
• Blue Display area – shows video title. Behind the text the progress bar shows the amount of time played. Names that are too wide to fully display in the player can be read in a tool tip by hovering the mouse over desired name.
• Progress Bar –Click the progress bar at the place you want to play or slide the arrow to the desired time.
• Video progress text – shows the current position in time for the song and total song duration.
• Player Controls are in left to right order:
• Full Screen Toggle
• Previous Video
• Play/Pause toggle
• Next Video
• Below the player controls is the volume control slider bar. You can grab and move this to left and right or click the desired position on the slider bar.
• If you choose full screen you can return to the player view by pressing the Escape key.
204
Chapter 13.
Troubleshooting & FAQs
E
RRORS
& L
IGHTS
What to do if the Server is Unresponsive
If the server appears to be unresponsive, do either of the following:
•
•
Shutdown and restart the server manually
Reset the server console
How to reset the server from the Windows Home Server Console.
To reset the server
1. If the Windows Home Server Console is open, click the Close button in the upper-left corner of the console.
2. Double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the task tray.
3. On the Windows Home Server Console startup page, click Options.
4. From the drop-down menu, select Reset the Windows Home Server Console.
5. Click OK to verify that you want to reset the console.
Shutdown and restart the server manually
How to force the server to turn off and restart.
To perform a soft shut down and restart
1. On the back of the server, press the Power button.
2. The health light should begin blinking.
The shutdown process may take up to two minutes to complete.
3. After the server is completely off, press the Power button to restart.
To force a shutdown and restart
1. On the back of the server, hold in the Power button for at least 4 seconds to force the server to shutdown.
205
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
2. After the server is completely off, press the Power button to restart.
Power-On Indicator is Off
The server is not powered on.
To power on the server
1. Make sure the power cord is fully plugged into the server and a powered electrical outlet.
2. If plugged into a surge protector or power strip, make sure the device is switched on.
Why is the Hard Drive Light-Bar Breathing or Blinking Aqua
White?
A breathing or blinking aqua white light bar indicates that a hard drive has been installed, but has not been initialized. It occurs in the following conditions:
• When setting up the server for first time—the light-bar is breathing aqua white until the set up on the first computer is complete.
• The drive has been removed from total storage and the light bar is blinking—for example, when removing a drive from the drive bay. See Removing a hard drive from the server.
• When adding a new drive the light bar blinks aqua white, before it has been added to server storage.
For information on initializing a hard drive, see Server Storage in the Windows Home Server
Console Help.
206
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Why is the Hard Drive Light-Bar Red?
A red light-bar indicates the following:
• That a hard drive has failed and must be replaced. Additionally, the connected computers show the following:
• The drive was removed from the drive bay before removing it from total storage. See Removing a hard drive in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
• Red icon on the task tray.
• Red indicator
on the Windows Home Server Console Network Health tab.
Why is the Server's Health Indicator Light Red?
A red Health indicator light has the following states:
• Solid red - operating system failure.
Blinking red - power on test has failed or BIOS failed.
Additionally, on your computers the Windows Home Server icon is grey on the task tray, which indicates the computer cannot contact Windows Home Server.
To get more information about the failure, the HP MediaSmart Server provides additional error codes.
To get the specific error code causing the failure
Use a paper clip to press and release the recessed Status/Recovery button on the front of the server.
What to do About Hardware Warning Messages?
Warning messages indicate Critical issues or At Risk issues.
• Critical issues - address immediately; otherwise, the server may be damaged.
• At Risk issues - address as soon as possible.
The HP MediaSmart Server monitors the temperature of the microprocessor (CPU), fan speed, and voltages. It displays the following messages:
207
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
•
•
•
Temperature warnings
Temperature warning messages indicate that some server components are too hot.
To lower the temperature of the server
1. Check the ventilation surrounding the server:
• If the server is located in a small unventilated space, move the server to a more ventilated location.
• Check that the server’s front and back panels are not blocked.
• Check that the location of the server is not too hot. Maximum environmental temperature for operating the server is 35° C (95° F).
2. Remove any accumulated dust on the back and front of the server.
Fold up the flap on any empty system drive trays. For more information, see
3. If none of the previous steps return the temperature to normal:
• Write down the temperatures of the CPU.
• Turn off the server.
• Contact HP Support at http://www.hp.com/support.
Fan speed warnings
The fans cool the disk drives and other electronics. If they are not cooling the server sufficiently, the hard drives and server may be damaged.
For fan speed out of specification
1. Write down the speeds of the upper and lower fans.
2. Turn off the server.
3. Contact HP Support at http://www.hp.com/support.
Voltages warnings
The voltages indicate the health of the server’s power supply.
For voltages out of specification
1. Write down the voltages.
208
Troubleshooting & FAQs
2. Turn off the server.
3. Contact HP Support at http://www.hp.com/support .
No Server Found
If the recovery program cannot find the server, the most likely causes are:
• The Recovery Mode was not successfully initiated—repeat step 5 if you did not push the
Status/Recovery button while the Health indicator lights was blinking red and aqua white.
• A firewall is blocking the connection - configure the firewall to allow the Windows Home Server
Recovery application or to allow connections over TCP port 8192 and UDP port 8192. If opening these ports, be sure to close them after the recovery has completed. For more information, see the vendor’s documentation.
• The network connection is not working. For troubleshooting network connections, see
Network
Connection Issues .
Recovery Fails
If the recovery fails, one of the following messages will be displayed:
• The server disks could not be reformatted
The partition data on the server could not be written
• The primary volume on the server could not be written
• The recovery image could not be loaded
The most likely causes of these messages are:
A connection failure.
1. Make sure that you are using a wired connection to the server from the computer you are using to do the recovery.
2. Check network connections
3. Repeat the recovery or reset.
File Transfer Failure
What to do about a failure when transferring files to the HP MediaSmart Server from your computer.
To correct a file transfer failure
1. Compare files that you were transferring with the files on the shared folder and try transferring the missing files again.
2. If the transfer fails again, check that you can access the Windows Home Server.
209
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
3. If you cannot access the Windows Home Server, check the network connections:
• Make sure that all the cable connections are correctly plugged in.
• Make sure the HP MediaSmart Server has power and the Network indicator light is aqua white .
Make sure the router (or switch) has power.
• Restart the router or switch (or unplug and plug it back in).
• Restart all the devices on the network, including the computers and the server.
Make sure your server and computers are on the same logical network (subnet). See What is an
advanced network configuration? in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
4. If the computer that you transferring files from is connected wirelessly to the network, try connecting it with an ethernet cable.
5. Check the Event Viewer to see if the System logs show a disconnect:
• In Windows XP, click Start, Control Panel, Performance and Maintenance,
Administrative Tools, and then select Event Viewer.
• In Windows Vista, click Start, Control Panel, System and Maintenance,
Administrative Tools, and then select Event Viewer.
Health Indicator Codes
The Tables below are a breakdown of the Health indicator displays. To see this code, using a paper clip, press and release the recessed Status/Recovery button on the front of the server.
Code
Health indicator codes when the indicator starts as solid red
Description Action
Solid red—no code
1 aqua white, 2 red
Operating system or application error.
System drive failed to boot.
See Windows Home Server
Console for error condition.
If the light-bar for the system drive (the lowest light-bar) is
also red, you need to replace the system hard drive .
210
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Code
Health indicator codes when the indicator starts as solid red
Description Action
1 aqua white, 3 red
1 aqua white, 4 red
1 aqua white, 5 red
1 aqua white, 6 red
Operating system USB boot failed.
Recovery mode failed.
Multiple boot failure.
Service code.
Check that lowest USB port on back of server has boot source.
Contact HP Support at http://www.hp.com/support .
Contact HP Support at http://www.hp.com/support .
Do not hold state button longer that 3 seconds. Shut down and repeat.
Codes when the indicator starts as blinking red
Description Action Code
2 aqua white, 1 red BIOS corrupted.
2 aqua white, 2 red
2 aqua white, 3 red
Memory failure.
BIOS recovery source not present.
Repeat power-on to validate. If repeats Contact HP Support at http://www.hp.com/support .
Contact HP Support at http://www.hp.com/support .
Contact HP Support at http://www.hp.com/support .
Why is the Network Connection Light Off?
To determine why the network connection light is off:
• Make sure that all the cable connections are correctly plugged in.
Make sure the router or switch has power.
• Restart the router or switch (or unplug and plug it back in).
• If you are using your own Ethernet cable, try using the Ethernet cable that came with the HP
MediaSmart Server.
211
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
The Network Connection Light Blinking Aqua White
The server is intermittently connected to the network.
Check the cable connection between the server and the router /switch.
Server Not Showing Up on Your DMR
Issue:
The HP MediaSmart Server is not listed on your DMR or DMA.
Solution:
You can either:
•
Turn on Windows Home Server Media Sharing
•
Turn on Windows Home Server Media Sharing
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click Settings in the upper right corner.
4. Click the Media Sharing link in the left navigation bar.
5. Click the On radio button for at least one of the folders.
212
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Turn on TwonkyMedia
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click TwonkyMedia in the left navigation.
If you do not see TwonkyMedia in the left navigation, the add-in is not installed. Click Settings in the upper right corner. Click Add-ins in the left navigation of the Windows Home Server
Settings dialog. On the Available tab, install the TwonkyMedia Server for HP MediaSmart.
4. In the right pane, click Start Sharing and then click Media Server Settings.
Checking the Server Lights Out of the Box
Question:
How should my server lights look when I turn it on for the first time?
Answer:
The lights on the front of the HP MediaSmart Server indicate the status of the server. After the HP
MediaSmart Server startup completes and prior to the first software installation, the indicator lights show:
213
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• Hard drives—breathing aqua white
• Network—breathing aqua white
• Health—breathing aqua white
After you complete the software installation, all lights should be solid aqua white.
If the lights are not solid aqua white, see the following:
•
Why is the hard drive light-bar breathing or blinking aqua white?
•
Why is the hard drive light-bar red?
•
•
Why is the server’s health indicator light red?
Windows Home Server Frequently Asked Questions
Server Low on Space.
Clean out unused files.
Earmark backups for deletion and 'clean up now', delete unused docs from Shared Folders .
Cannot Connect to Server Shares.
• A duplicate device exists on the network.
Verify that there is no device on the network named hpserver.
• User names and passwords do not match.
Create a user on the server whose name and password match the user on the PC or enable the
Guest account.
Hubs and Network Health Light
Some network hubs, as opposed to switches or routers, may reduce performance between your computer and the HP MediaSmart Server, or the hub may prevent your computer from communicating with the server. If this is a problem, the network health indicator light on the front of the server will be off. Replacing the hub with a switch may improve the network performance or restore connectivity.
N
ETWORK
& F
IREWALL
Network Connection Issues
In this document we will cover:
•
No Available Port on Network Router
214
Troubleshooting & FAQs
•
•
What_do_Firewall_Blocking_Messages_Mean?
•
Why is the Network Connection Light Off?
•
The Firewall is Blocking the Connection
•
Windows Vista: Check that Network Discovery is turned on
•
Windows XP: To ensure your network is set up properly for TCP/IP
•
Windows Vista: To ensure your network is set up properly for TCP/IP
•
Windows XP: To ensure your network has the correct NetBIOS set up
•
Windows Vista: To ensure your network has the correct NetBIOS set up
No Available Port on Network Router
Take the following steps:
To add more Ethernet ports, connect an Ethernet switch to the router. Refer to the switch documentation for instructions on how it connects to the router.
Connect one end of the Ethernet cable that came with the server to the switch and the other end to the HP MediaSmart Server.
Why did URL not Work?
DNS has not updated, wait about 10 minutes for DNS to update.
What do Firewall Blocking Messages Mean?
Firewalls block certain types of communications between network devices. This helps protect your data from hackers, viruses, spyware, and Trojan horse software. The computer might have one or more firewall programs installed. For example, if the latest version of the Microsoft Windows XP operating system is installed, the computer may be using the Windows XP Firewall.
The HP MediaSmart Server comes with software applications that must communicate over the network. Sometimes these programs are blocked by a firewall. When this happens, security alerts pop up on the computer screen.
Security alerts usually have a list of possible options. The particular messages or alerts displayed depend on the vender.
For example, the alert might offer the following options:
• Keep Blocking
• Unblock
• Defer the choice and be reminded later
If a security alert dialog box for an HP MediaSmart Server application or the Windows Home
Server is displayed by the firewall, click Unblock or Allow to permit the application to execute. It
215
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide is safe to unblock the communications because no connection or communication with the Internet is enabled, only those between the server and its software applications. After unblocking an application, if any software is reinstalled, moved to a new disk location, or if the application is deleted from the exception list using the Windows XP Security Center control panel, communications between that software and the server may once again be blocked by the firewall.
Configure your firewall to allow any HP MediaSmart or Windows Home Server applications.
Why is the Network Connection Light Off?
To determine why the network connection light is off:
• Make sure that all the cable connections are correctly plugged in.
• Make sure the router or switch has power.
• Restart the router or switch (or unplug and plug it back in).
• If you are using your own Ethernet cable, try using the Ethernet cable that came with the HP
MediaSmart Server.
The Firewall is Blocking the Connection
If using a firewall program, configure it to allow any HP MediaSmart or Windows Home Server applications.
For instructions to unblock, see the software vendor's documentation.
For information about firewall blocking alerts, see What do firewall blocking messages mean?
Windows Vista: Check that Network Discovery is turned on
To ensure that Network Discovery is turned on
1. Click the Start menu, and then select Control Panel.
216
Troubleshooting & FAQs
2. In the Control Panel, click View network status and tasks.
3. In the Network and Sharing Center, make sure that Network discovery is on.
4. If Network discovery is off, click the down arrow , then select Turn on network discovery and Apply.
Windows XP: To ensure your network is set up properly for
TCP/IP
1. Click Start, and then select Control Panel.
2. Double-click Network and Internet Connections.
3. Double-click Network Connections.
If the computer is connected via Ethernet cable to the network, right-click Local Area
Connection ( LAN ).
4. If the computer is using a wireless connection, right-click Wireless Network Connection.
5. Click Properties. In the dialog box that opens, check to ensure that TCP/IP is listed and selected.
If TCP/IP is not listed, click Install, Protocol , and then Add. In the dialog box that appears, select
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
If TCP/IP is listed and checked, highlight it and click Properties, then select Obtain IP address
automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically.
6. All computers should be set identically.
Windows Vista: To ensure your network is set up properly for
TCP/IP
1. Click Start, and then select Control Panel.
2. Click View network status and tasks under Network and Internet.
3. In the left pane, click Manage Network Connections.
4. If the computer is connected via Ethernet cable to the network, right-click Local Area
Connection (LAN).
5. If the computer is using a wireless connection, right-click Wireless Network Connection.
6. Click Properties. In the dialog box that opens, check to ensure that Internet Protocol Version 4
TCP/IPv4 is listed and selected.
• If TCP/IP is not listed, click Install, Protocol, and then Add. In the dialog box that appears, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IPv4).
• If TCP/IP is listed and checked, highlight it and click Properties, then select Obtain IP
address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically.
7. All computers should be set identically.
217
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Windows XP: To ensure your network has the correct NetBIOS set up
1. Click Start, and then select Control Panel.
2. Double-click Network and Internet connections.
3. Double-click Network Connections.
4. Double-click your default network connection.
• Local Area Connection for wired networks.
• Wireless for wireless connections.
5. Click Properties.
6. Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
7. Click Properties.
8. Click Advanced.
9. Click the WINS tab.
WINS refers to Windows Internet Naming Service, which converts NetBIOS network names to IP addresses.
10. NetBIOS settings are found at the bottom of the dialog box. Make sure that the NetBIOS setting is
not set to Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
Windows Vista: To ensure your network has the correct NetBIOS set up
1. Click Start, and then select Control Panel.
2. Click View network status and tasks under Network and Internet.
3. In the left pane, click Manage Network Connections.
4. Right-click your default network connection.
• Local Area Connection for wired networks.
• Wireless for wireless connections.
5. Highlight Internet Protocol Version 4(TCP/IP).
6. Click Properties.
7. Click Advanced.
8. Click the WINS tab.
WINS refers to Windows Internet Naming Service, which converts NetBIOS network names to IP addresses.
9. NetBIOS settings are found at the bottom of the dialog box. Make sure that the NetBIOS setting is
not set to Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
218
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Network Health
The Windows Home Server console contains a Network Health button to view the health of your network.
The Home Network Health dialog box shows health notifications from the server and the computers that are running Windows Vista.
To access the Network Health button
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click the Network Health button.
For assistance with Network Health notifications, see the following in the Windows Home Server
Console Help:
• Network Health
• Home Server Health Notifications
• Home Computer Health Notifications
Why is the Network Connection Light Off?
To determine why the network connection light is off:
• Make sure that all the cable connections are correctly plugged in.
Make sure the router or switch has power.
• Restart the router or switch (or unplug and plug it back in).
• If you are using your own Ethernet cable, try using the Ethernet cable that came with the HP
MediaSmart Server.
219
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
The Network Connection Light Blinking Aqua White
The server is intermittently connected to the network.
Check the cable connection between the server and the router /switch.
The Firewall is Blocking the Connection
If using a firewall program, configure it to allow any HP MediaSmart or Windows Home Server applications.
For instructions to unblock, see the software vendor's documentation.
What do Firewall Blocking Messages Mean?
Firewalls block certain types of communications between network devices. This helps protect your data from hackers, viruses, spyware, and Trojan horse software. The computer might have one or more firewall programs installed. For example, if the latest version of the Microsoft Windows XP operating system is installed, the computer may be using the Windows XP Firewall.
The HP MediaSmart Server comes with software applications that must communicate over the network. Sometimes these programs are blocked by a firewall. When this happens, security alerts pop up on the computer screen.
Security alerts usually have a list of possible options. The particular messages or alerts displayed depend on the vender.
For example, the alert might offer the following options:
• Keep Blocking
• Unblock
220
Troubleshooting & FAQs
• Defer the choice and be reminded later
If a security alert dialog box for an HP MediaSmart Server application or the Windows Home
Server is displayed by the firewall, click Unblock or Allow to permit the application to execute. It is safe to unblock the communications because no connection or communication with the Internet is enabled, only those between the server and its software applications. After unblocking an application, if any software is reinstalled, moved to a new disk location, or if the application is deleted from the exception list using the Windows XP Security Center control panel, communications between that software and the server may once again be blocked by the firewall.
Configure your firewall to allow any HP MediaSmart or Windows Home Server applications.
Check that the Router is Correctly Configured for DHCP
The HP MediaSmart Server comes automatically set to use a DHCP server to dynamically assign
IP addresses. Most router come with a built-in DHCP server.
Check that the router has the DHCP server correctly enabled. Refer to the documentation that came with the router for instructions on proper DHCP server configuration.
For information about configuring a router for remote access, see Configuring your broadband
router in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
Windows Vista: Check that Network Discovery is turned on
To ensure that Network Discovery is turned on
1. Click the Start menu, and then select Control Panel.
2. In the Control Panel, click View network status and tasks.
3. In the Network and Sharing Center, make sure that Network discovery is on.
4. If Network discovery is off, click the down arrow , then select Turn on network discovery and Apply.
Check the Network is Set Up Properly for TCP/IP
Check the network is set up properly for TCP/IP Check that each computer on the network has
TCP/IP listed and selected for the network properties with these options selected:
Obtain IP address automatically
Obtain DNS server address automatically
Windows XP: To ensure your network is set up properly for
TCP/IP
1. Click Start, and then select Control Panel.
2. Double-click Network and Internet Connections.
3. Double-click Network Connections.
221
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
If the computer is connected via Ethernet cable to the network, right-click Local Area
Connection ( LAN ).
4. If the computer is using a wireless connection, right-click Wireless Network Connection.
5. Click Properties. In the dialog box that opens, check to ensure that TCP/IP is listed and selected.
If TCP/IP is not listed, click Install, Protocol , and then Add. In the dialog box that appears, select
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
• If TCP/IP is listed and checked, highlight it and click Properties, then select Obtain IP
address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically.
6. All computers should be set identically.
Windows Vista: To ensure your network is set up properly for
TCP/IP
1. Click Start, and then select Control Panel.
2. Click View network status and tasks under Network and Internet.
3. In the left pane, click Manage Network Connections.
4. If the computer is connected via Ethernet cable to the network, right-click Local Area
Connection (LAN).
5. If the computer is using a wireless connection, right-click Wireless Network Connection.
6. Click Properties. In the dialog box that opens, check to ensure that Internet Protocol Version 4
TCP/IPv4 is listed and selected.
• If TCP/IP is not listed, click Install, Protocol, and then Add. In the dialog box that appears, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IPv4).
• If TCP/IP is listed and checked, highlight it and click Properties, then select Obtain IP
address automatically and Obtain DNS server address automatically.
7. All computers should be set identically.
Check the Network NetBIOS Properties
Check that each computer on the network has TCP/IP advanced network properties set to Enable
NetBIOS over TCP/IP. All computers should be set identically.
Windows XP: To ensure your network has the correct NetBIOS set up
1. Click Start, and then select Control Panel.
2. Double-click Network and Internet connections.
3. Double-click Network Connections.
4. Double-click your default network connection.
222
Troubleshooting & FAQs
• Local Area Connection for wired networks.
• Wireless for wireless connections.
5. Click Properties.
Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
6. Click Properties.
7. Click Advanced.
8. Click the WINS tab.
WINS refers to Windows Internet Naming Service, which converts NetBIOS network names to IP addresses.
9. NetBIOS settings are found at the bottom of the dialog box. Make sure that the NetBIOS setting is
not set to Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
Windows Vista: To ensure your network has the correct NetBIOS set up
1. Click Start, and then select Control Panel.
2. Click View network status and tasks under Network and Internet.
3. In the left pane, click Manage Network Connections.
4. Right-click your default network connection.
• Local Area Connection for wired networks.
• Wireless for wireless connections.
5. Highlight Internet Protocol Version 4(TCP/IP).
6. Click Properties.
7. Click Advanced.
8. Click the WINS tab.
WINS refers to Windows Internet Naming Service, which converts NetBIOS network names to IP addresses.
9. NetBIOS settings are found at the bottom of the dialog box. Make sure that the NetBIOS setting is
not set to Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP.
Network Frequently Asked Questions
The following questions are answered in this document. Click the question to find the solution:
No Available Port on Network Router
• Why did URL not Work?
223
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
No Available Port on Network Router
Take the following steps:
1. To add more Ethernet ports, connect an Ethernet switch to the router. Refer to the switch documentation for instructions on how it connects to the router.
2. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable that came with the server to the switch and the other end to the HP MediaSmart Server.
Why did URL not Work?
DNS has not updated, wait about 10 minutes for DNS to update.
What do Firewall Blocking Messages Mean?
Firewalls block certain types of communications between network devices. This helps protect your data from hackers, viruses, spyware, and Trojan horse software. The computer might have one or more firewall programs installed. For example, if the latest version of the Microsoft Windows XP operating system is installed, the computer may be using the Windows XP Firewall.
The HP MediaSmart Server comes with software applications that must communicate over the network. Sometimes these programs are blocked by a firewall. When this happens, security alerts pop up on the computer screen.
Security alerts usually have a list of possible options. The particular messages or alerts displayed depend on the vender.
For example, the alert might offer the following options:
• Keep Blocking
• Unblock
• Defer the choice and be reminded later
If a security alert dialog box for an HP MediaSmart Server application or the Windows Home
Server is displayed by the firewall, click Unblock or Allow to permit the application to execute. It is safe to unblock the communications because no connection or communication with the Internet is enabled, only those between the server and its software applications. After unblocking an application, if any software is reinstalled, moved to a new disk location, or if the application is deleted from the exception list using the Windows XP Security Center control panel, communications between that software and the server may once again be blocked by the firewall.
Configure your firewall to allow any HP MediaSmart or Windows Home Server applications.
What are Optimum Data Throughput Speeds for Different
Network Interfaces?
Depending on the network interface your computer uses, you will experience different rates of data transfer to your server. Network Interfaces are described in terms of their ideal maximum speed, but many factors can affect the actual data transfer speeds you will experience. For example, your optimal wireless transfer speed will be reduced depending on the type of security
224
Troubleshooting & FAQs and encryption you have enabled on your wireless network and by the amount of other work your computer and server are performing at the same time.
What are optimum data throughput speeds for different network interfaces?
• Gigabit Ethernet - 1000mbps/125MBs.
• Fast Ethernet - 100mbps/12.5MBs.
• Wireless N - 600mbps/75MBs.
• Wireless G - 54mbps/6.75MBs.
• Wireless A -54mbps/6.75MBs.
• Wireless B - 11mbps/1.375MBs.
What is the ideal minimum time to transfer a 1GB file for different network interfaces?
• Gigabit Ethernet - 8s.
• Fast Ethernet - 1min 20s.
• Wireless N -13.3s.
• Wireless G - 2min 28s.
• Wireless A - 2min 28s.
• Wireless B -12min 7s.
Updating Your Firewall's Trusted Program List
The HP MediaSmart Server Software Installation Disc installs several programs that enable your computer to communicate with the HP MediaSmart Server over your network. Software firewalls installed on your computer can block this communication and prevent the computer from locating the HP MediaSmart Server on your network. The following steps are recommended before installing the HP MediaSmart Server programs:
Launch your firewall and anti-virus software and update the trusted programs list.
• Verify that your firewall and anti-virus software is set to "Learn" new programs. After the HP
MediaSmart Server software is installed, the firewall should prompt you to allow the installed programs to communicate with the server.
• If you are using a firewall or anti-virus program that cannot automatically update its trusted software list, please contact the firewall or anti-virus software vendor to find out how to manually add software to the trusted software list. Then, visit click here to go to http://www.hp.com/support for a list of software to add.
225
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
What Value does TZO Domain Names Provide Beyond the
Microsoft Live Option?
Some broadband ISPs block Port 80 which is required for easy remote access. The TZO service allows you to obtain easy remote access even if Port 80 is blocked.
• With the Microsoft domain name, if you don't already have a Microsoft Live account, you'll have to set that up.
• With TZO custom domain name option, you can get your own domain name (e.g., smithfamily.com).
• TZO customer support and troubleshooting
The First Backup is Taking a Long Time.
Your initial PC backup could take several hours, depending on how much data you have on your computer. Subsequent backups will go much faster since only the data that has changed is copied to the server.
P
OWER
M
ANAGEMENT
Uninterruptible Power Supply is not Supported
The Media Smart Server does not support active Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS). Using the
USB cable to allow the UPS to communicate with the MediaSmart Server, can cause a wide range of false errors. Using the UPS in a passive mode (USB cable not attached) does not appear to cause any false error reporting.
S
ERVER
R
ECOVERY AND
F
ACTORY
R
ESET
Using Server Recovery and Factory Reset
•
Choosing Server Recovery or Factory Reset?
•
Recovering or resetting the server
To help recover or reset the server, the HP MediaSmart Server includes a Server Recovery Disc.
Using this disc requires a DVD drive.
Server Recovery attempts to recover all data and restore the folders. However, because of the state of the system prior to the recovery, not all data may be able to be recovered or integrated into the folder structure.
Note
For information about recovering a computer, see
226
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Choosing Server Recovery or Factory Reset?
How to chose which process to use.
Caution
During Server Recovery , all system settings, such as User Accounts and settings, are lost. You will need to recreate them. During Factory Reset, in addition to loosing all system settings, the data on all drives is lost.
The following table will help you determine whether to choose Server Recovery or Factory Reset.
Choosing Server Recovery or Factory Reset
Server’s system hard drive has been replaced.
Server Recovery
Server operating system has been corrupted.
Disk replacement - partition data on other storage drives are okay.
If you have lost your password.
Factory Reset
The partition data on the other storage drives is corrupted.
Giving away or selling the server. See the caution below this table.
Caution
Factory Reset does not remove data from the drives; instead it allows the existing data to be overwritten. To insure that your data can never be accessed, use a “shredder” program that overwrites the hard drives with random numbers or meaningless data.
Recovering or resetting the server
Caution
Steps for performing a Server Recovery or Factory Reset. To recover or reset the server Use the
Server Recovery Disc from a computer using a wired connection to the router (or switch). A wireless connection is not recommended. Additionally, if the server is some distance from the computer you are using for Server Recovery or Factory Reset, it may be more convenient to move the server near the computer.
1. If the HP MediaSmart Server Control Center is open on your computer, close it before proceeding.
2. Insert the Server Recovery Disc into a DVD drive in a computer connected to the network by an
Ethernet cable.
The Server Recovery program automatically starts.
227
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
3. Click Next.
4. Uninstall HP MediaSmart Server and Windows Home Server Connector:
• Click Start, Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs.
• Click on HP MediaSmart Server, click Remove.
• Click on Windows Home Server Connector, click Remove.
5. Prepare the server for recovery or reset:
228
Troubleshooting & FAQs
• On the back of the server, hold in the Power button for at least 4 seconds to force the server to shutdown.
• After the server is completely off, locate the recessed Status/Recovery button on the front of the server and prepare to press this button with a paper clip.
• On the back of the server, press the Power button to restart.
• While the Health indicator is blinking aqua white
and red , use a paper clip to press the recessed Status/Recovery button until it clicks.
Recovery mode is initiated.
• If recovery mode is successfully initiated, the Health indicator light blinks pink and red repeating. After alternating a few times, the Health indicator light turns solid pink.
6. On the Rebooting your server into recovery mode dialog box, click Next, and then follow the instructions on each dialog box.
During the recovery process, the following may happen:
• If the recovery program cannot find the server, see No server found below.
• If the Server Recovery cannot recover the partition data, the progress bar will go to 100% and then back to zero and start over.
.
7. After the Server Recovery or Factory Reset completes, the server automatically restarts. Before taking the next step wait until the Health indicator light is solid aqua white .
8. You must reinstall the software on each of your computers, including the computer that you used to perform the recovery - otherwise, you won’t be able to use the server.
9. Click Finish on the Server recovery complete dialog box.
10. The HP MediaSmart Server software will automatically be installed on the computer where you performed the Server Recovery or Factory Reset.
Caution
If you did not close the HP MediaSmart Server Control Center, as indicated in step 1, you may see a message asking you to reboot your computer. If you see this message, choose to reboot later.
Otherwise, rebooting may leave the server in a state where it cannot be configured, and you will have to repeat the recovery or reset process.
229
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Note
It takes a few minutes for the server to go through the finishing process. Please be patient.
To install the software on other client computers , see
Installing the Software on Additional Home
Backing Up and Restoring a Computer
Backing up and restoring a computer is available through the Backups & Computers tab on the
Windows Home Server console.
To access the Backups & Computers tab
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click the Backups & Computers tab.
For assistance backing up or restoring a computer, see the following in the Windows Home Server
Console Help:
• Computers & Backup
• How does backup work?
• Managing and Configuring Backups
• Restoring Computer Backups
• Removing a Computer
• Troubleshooting Computers & Backup
Computer Recovery
To help you recover your computer and data in the event of a hard drive failure, the HP
MediaSmart Server includes a PC Restore Disc. Use this disc to restore your computer from the
HP MediaSmart Server in the event of the following:
To restore the system drive .
• When the operating system will not start (boot).
• If you cannot use System Restore to restore the system files.
Caution
To ensure that you have the latest version of the PC Restore Disc, contact HP support at http://www.hp.com/support .
The Microsoft® Windows® Preinstallation Environment software included with this computer or software may be used for boot, diagnostic, setup, restoration, installation, configuration, test or disaster recovery purposes only.
230
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Note
THIS SOFTWARE CONTAINS A SECURITY FEATURE THAT WILL CAUSE END USER
CUSTOMER'S SYSTEM TO REBOOT WITHOUT PRIOR NOTIFICATION TO THE END
USER CUSTOMER AFTER 24 HOURS OF CONTINUOUS USE.
To recover your computer
1. Insert the PC Restore Disc into a CD/DVD drive in the computer you want to restore.
2. Restart the computer, and boot from the CD.
3. Follow the instructions in the Restore Wizard.
For additional information about restoring computer backups, see Restoring Computer Backups in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
Recovering or resetting the server
Caution
Steps for performing a Server Recovery or Factory Reset. To recover or reset the server Use the
Server Recovery Disc from a computer using a wired connection to the router (or switch). A wireless connection is not recommended. Additionally, if the server is some distance from the computer you are using for Server Recovery or Factory Reset, it may be more convenient to move the server near the computer.
1. If the HP MediaSmart Server Control Center is open on your computer, close it before proceeding.
2. Insert the Server Recovery Disc into a DVD drive in a computer connected to the network by an
Ethernet cable.
The Server Recovery program automatically starts.
3. Click Next.
4. Uninstall HP MediaSmart Server and Windows Home Server Connector:
231
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• Click Start, Control Panel and select Add or Remove Programs.
• Click on HP MediaSmart Server, click Remove.
• Click on Windows Home Server Connector, click Remove.
5. Prepare the server for recovery or reset:
• On the back of the server, hold in the Power button for at least 4 seconds to force the server to shutdown.
• After the server is completely off, locate the recessed Status/Recovery button on the front of the server and prepare to press this button with a paper clip.
232
• On the back of the server, press the Power button to restart.
• While the Health indicator is blinking aqua white
and red , use a paper clip to press the recessed Status/Recovery button until it clicks.
Recovery mode is initiated.
• If recovery mode is successfully initiated, the Health indicator light blinks pink and red repeating. After alternating a few times, the Health indicator light turns solid pink.
Troubleshooting & FAQs
6. On the Rebooting your server into recovery mode dialog box, click Next, and then follow the instructions on each dialog box.
During the recovery process, the following may happen:
• If the recovery program cannot find the server, see No server found below.
If the Server Recovery cannot recover the partition data, the progress bar will go to 100% and then back to zero and start over.
.
7. After the Server Recovery or Factory Reset completes, the server automatically restarts. Before taking the next step wait until the Health indicator light is solid aqua white .
8. You must reinstall the software on each of your computers, including the computer that you used to perform the recovery - otherwise, you won’t be able to use the server.
9. Click Finish on the Server recovery complete dialog box.
10. The HP MediaSmart Server software will automatically be installed on the computer where you performed the Server Recovery or Factory Reset.
Caution
If you did not close the HP MediaSmart Server Control Center, as indicated in step 1, you may see a message asking you to reboot your computer. If you see this message, choose to reboot later.
Otherwise, rebooting may leave the server in a state where it cannot be configured, and you will have to repeat the recovery or reset process.
Note
It takes a few minutes for the server to go through the finishing process. Please be patient.
To install the software on other client computers , see
Installing the Software on Additional Home
Recovery fails
If the recovery fails, one of the following messages will be displayed:
• The server disks could not be reformatted
The partition data on the server could not be written
• The primary volume on the server could not be written
• The recovery image could not be loaded
The most likely causes of these messages are:
A connection failure.
1. Make sure that you are using a wired connection to the server from the computer you are using to do the recovery.
2. Check network connections.
233
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
3. Repeat the recovery or reset.
Installing the Software using a Browser
Use the Software Installation Disc to install both the HP MediaSmart Server software and the
Windows Home Server Connector software. You can also install the Server software using a Web browser with this link: http:\\hpserver:55000 .
1. Turn on the Server.
All of the LED's will be in a pulsing state.
2. Open a Web Browser and type the following address http://hpserver:55000.
The Windows Home Server Connector Setup window opens.
3. Click Download Now.
Note
You can come back later to get the toolkit or contact information. Type the Address <name of server:55000> in this example http://hpserver:55000.
234
Troubleshooting & FAQs
4. A file download security warning and a Internet Explorer dialog box may pop up. Click Run.
5. A dialog box opens stating that software is being downloaded from your HPSERVER. Click Next, when the download is complete.
6. The Install Wizard opens and gives you the rest of the installation instructions.
S
ERVER
S
TORAGE
Expanding Server Storage
You can expand storage in the HP MediaSmart Server in several ways:
Add one or more SATA hard drives to the server’s internal expansion bays. (Integrated Drive
Electronics (IDE) drives are not supported.)
• Add up to four USB disk drives to the server’s USB ports.
• Add an external SATA (eSATA) hard drive to the server’s external eSATA port.
The following topics provide information on expanding server storage:
•
• Installing and removing an external USB disk drive or eSATA drive
• Adding and removing drives from server storage
Adding an Internal SATA Drive
How to place a hard drive into an expansion bay in the HP MediaSmart Server.
235
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Important
Do not remove the bottom drive. This drive contains the Windows Home Server operating system.
Important
There are two parts to adding an internal drive: add the drive to an expansion bay and then initialize the drive so it becomes part of the total server storage.
To add a SATA drive to an expansion bay
1. Determine which expansion bay to use:
• The light-bar for an empty expansion bay is off.
• Add the new hard drive to the lowest available expansion bay.
2. Open the door on the front of the server.
3. On the lowest empty hard-drive tray, press down the lever to unlock the handle.
4. Lift the handle all the way up.
5. Gently pull the hard-drive tray from the expansion bay.
6. Fold down the flap near the back of the hard-drive tray.
236
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Note
This flap improves air flow through the server. If you remove a drive, be sure to fold this flap back up.
7. Insert the new drive into the left side of the hard-drive tray, making sure that the pins go into the hard drive’s mounting holes.
8. Flex the right side-rail, and then insert the pins into the hard drive’s mounting holes.
9. With the handle up, slide the hard-drive tray and drive into the expansion bay.
10. Press down on the handle on the hard-drive tray until it locks.
11. Close the door on the front of the server.
237
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
11. Notice that within a few seconds the light-bar for the new hard drive pulsates aqua white
This indicates that the hard drive has been installed, but has not been initialized.
12.
Add the drive to the server’s total storage .
Removing an Internal SATA Drive
How to remove a hard drive from an expansion bay in the HP MediaSmart Server.
For information about removing the system drive
Caution
Before removing a drive from an expansion bay, you must remove the drive from the server’s total storage.
For information about removing a drive from total storage, see Adding and Removing Drives from
To remove a hard drive from an expansion bay
1. Be sure that the light-bar for the hard drive you want to remove is blinking aqua white
This indicates that the drive has been properly removed from the server’s total storage.
2. Open the door on the front of the HP MediaSmart Server.
.
3. On the drive you want to remove, press down the lever to unlock the handle.
4. Lift the handle of the hard-drive tray all the way up.
238
Troubleshooting & FAQs
5. Gently pull the system drive from the drive bay.
6. Flex the back of the right side-rail, and then withdraw the back pin from the hard drive by gently pulling the side-rail down and away.
7. Flex the front of the right side-rail, and then withdraw the front pin from the hard drive by gently pulling the side-rail down and away.
8. Remove the drive from the hard-drive tray.
9. Fold up the flap near the back of the hard-drive tray.
Note
Folding up the flap improves air flow and helps keep the server cool.
10. With the handle up, slide the hard-drive tray back into the system bay.
239
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
11. Close the handle on the hard-drive tray until it locks.
12. Close the door on the front of the server.
Adding and Removing Drives from Server Storage
Drives added or removed from an expansion bay or port must be added or removed from total server storage.
Caution
When adding a hard drive to server storage, the hard drive is formatted. Make sure to back up any important files that are on the hard drive before adding it to server storage.
To add a drive to the server’s total storage
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click the Server Storage tab.
4. Follow the instructions in Adding a hard drive in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
To remove a drive from the server’s storage
If the server does not have enough remaining storage, and you do not first add another hard drive to server storage, either you will lose shared-folder duplication or you will lose files. This depends on how much server storage space remains after you remove a hard drive.
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
240
Troubleshooting & FAQs
3. Click the Server Storage tab.
4. Follow the instructions in Removing a hard drive in the Windows Home Server Console Help.
Adding and Removing an External USB Drive or eSATA
Drive
You can add external USB disk drives to any of the HP MediaSmart Server’s four USB ports. You can also add an eSATA drive to the eSATA port.
Important
There are two parts to adding external drives: connect the drive to a port and then initialize the drive so it becomes part of the total server storage.
To connect an external USB disk drive
If you use a USB disk drive, it is recommended that you use a drive that conforms to USB 2.0 or later.
1. Plug in the USB cable into one of the USB ports on the server.
2. To plug in and power up your external USB drive, see the documentation that came with your
USB disk drive.
Caution
The addition of multiple USB disk drives through an external USB hub is neither recommended nor supported.
3. Follow instructions in Adding and Removing Drives Server Storage
To connect an eSATA disk drive
1. Plug in the Serial ATA cable into the eSATA port on the back of the server, as shown in the following figure.
241
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
2. To plug in and power up your eSATA disk drive, see the documentation that came with your device.
3. Follow instructions in Adding and Removing Drives Server Storage
Replacing the System Drive
Replacing the internal system drive consists of four parts:
1.
2.
Re-installing the New System Drive
3. Resetting the System. See Using Server Recovery and Factory Reset.
4. Reinstall the software on each computer. See Installing the Software on Additional Home
Important
The system drive contains the Microsoft Windows Home Server operating system. The server cannot operate while the system drive is removed and must be re-installed via the Server Recovery
Disc or factory reset. See Using Server Recovery and Factory Reset.
Removing the System Drive
The following figure shows the location of the system hard drive.
To remove the system drive
1. Hold in the Power button for at least 4 seconds to force the server to shutdown.
242
2. Open the door on the front of the server.
3. Using a coin, turn the security knob clockwise to unlock the drive.
4. On the bottom drive, press down the lever to release the handle.
Troubleshooting & FAQs
5. Lift the handle all the way up.
6. Gently pull the system drive from the drive bay.
7. Flex the back of the right side-rail and withdraw the back pin from the hard drive by gently pulling the side-rail down and away.
8. Flex the front of the right side-rail and withdraw the front pin from the hard drive by gently pulling the side-rail down and away.
243
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
9. Remove the drive from the hard-drive tray.
Re-installing the New System Drive
This topic provides information about how to install the system drive.
To re-install the new system drive
1. Insert the new system drive into the left side of the hard-drive tray, making sure that the pins go into the hard drive’s mounting holes.
2. Flex the front of the right side-rail and insert the pin into the hard drive’s mounting hole, and then flex the back of the right side-rail and insert the pin into the other mounting hole.
3. With the handle up, slide the hard-drive tray and drive into the system bay.
Note
Don’t push on the handle; the tray won’t slide in.
4. Close the handle on the hard-drive tray by pressing down until it locks.
244
Troubleshooting & FAQs
5. Using a coin, turn the security knob counterclockwise to lock system drive in its bay.
6. Close the door on the front of the server.
7. Power on the server.
8. The HP MediaSmart Server lights will pulsate aqua white.
9. Perform a Factory Reset to initiate the drive. See Using Server Recovery and Factory Reset .
Can I Remove and Reattach A USB Drive
Yes, any USB drive that has been attached to the Server:
• To increase storage capacity of the Server or
• To back up files
If a USB drive is removed can be reattached.
NOTE:
If while the drive was unattached and filers were added to that drive these files will not available when it is reattached to the Server. The space occupied by these files will remain unavailable but the Server will not see data.
What Happens if a USB Drive Becomes Unattached
A USB drive has been successfully added to the "Servers Backup Hard Drives" or "Storage
Hard Drives" can become unattached to the Server. Some of the reasons a working USB drive might be unattached:
• The USB Drive loses its Power Supply.
• The USB cable comes loose from the drive or Server.
Verify that your USB Drive has power and the Cable connecting the drive to the server is firmly seated.
245
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
246
Troubleshooting & FAQs
USB Drive is unattached during a "Backup"
Should the USB drive become unattached for any reason during the backup, the backup will fail.
Once the USB drive has been seen by the server again, the next back up should work.
247
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
USB Drive used for Server Storage is Unattached
Should your USB drive become unattached to the server the status of the drive will show as
Missing.
Once you have confirmed that the cables are firmly seated the status of the USB Drive will change from Missing to Healthy.
S
TREAMING
M
EDIA iTunes Frequently Asked Questions
Song Selection from the Server is not Updating with New
Additions.
Server has not refreshed yet.
• Wait for the Server to synchronize.
• Click on eject button on the Server bar.
248
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Podcasts not Showing in Playlist.
Podcasts copied over will not show in playlist for server.
HP Media Collector does not Appear to be Working
HP Media Collector is used by the HP MediaSmart Server to copy music, photos, and videos of users that have accounts on the HP MediaSmart Server.
There are some common causes for the HP Media Collector to appear not to work:
•
•
The Server may not have refreshed yet
•
Accounts may not match or guest account disabled
•
•
Media Type is not Enabled for Collection
•
Home Computer is not Included as a Scanned Computer
No music/media in library
Add music to library.
Also look at the following sections for more troubleshooting ideas:
•
The aggregation application that runs on the client is not running or is failing
•
The aggregation application may not be accessing the desired material on the client side
•
The server may be down or unreachable
The aggregation application that runs on the client is not running or is failing
At a lower level, this could also have several causes. The most likely one is that there is a problem running the automatically scheduled aggregation task. The user can browse to the list of scheduled tasks, turn on view hidden tasks, and look for a task called MediaAggregator.txt. Located at
"C:\Documents and Settings\<user>\Local Settings\Application Data\Hewlett-Packard\HP
MediaSmart Server"
If this task does not exist, then there has been a problem setting up the task and they should probably log out and log in again. This should cause a startup task to run (normal installation sets this up for all users). If the task exists, the user can see when it last ran, which indicates whether it ran recently enough to pick up the changes. You can check how often the aggregation is configured to run. You can also select the task and manually run it.
The scheduling, as mentioned above, can be a problem if the user has just changed to a more frequent setting, but the next scheduled run (according to the old setting) is well in the future. The changed setting won't be picked up until it runs next in the schedule, or the user logs out and in again, or until the user manually runs the task.
249
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Other likely failures are covered below, like being unable to reach the server and unable to read the configuration file.
Also, if no user is logged in to the networked computer, the aggregation client won't run.
In these cases, look at the music share to see if the content appears there.
The aggregation application may not be accessing the desired music on the client side
The iTunes aggregator runs with the permissions of the logged on user, if the material to be aggregated is in a folder that the user doesn't have permission to access, then that folder's contents can't be aggregated when this user is logged in.
The server may be down or unreachable
If the network computer cannot access the shares or the console on the server, the server may be down, so aggregation cannot occur.
The Server may not have refreshed yet
1. Click the Eject button on the Server Bar in iTunes.
2. Click the HP MediaSmart Server button on the Windows Home Server Console and your music files should now be seen.
Accounts may not match
If family members want to access information on your home network from an Internet café, coffee shop, or other location outside of your home, they need individual user accounts with strong passwords.
When you create user accounts on the server, use logon names and passwords that match the logon names and passwords of existing user accounts on your home computers. Creating matching user accounts enables family members to automatically log on to the server when they log on to their home computer.
If the user accounts and passwords do not match, you will be prompted to type a user name and password when you open the server’s shared folders .
Create a User account that matches your computer's account.
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click the User Accounts tab.
If you have already dismissed the Windows Home Server user help dialog, then skip to step 6.
The User Accounts Setup dialog displays. Click Set Policy to force a password strength for all user accounts and click OK. (optional)
User accounts that are enabled for remote access in the Add User Account Wizard in step 6 below, require a strong password regardless of what is selected on the Set Policy page.
4. Click OK on the User Accounts Setup dialog to begin creating user accounts.
250
Troubleshooting & FAQs
5. Click Add, and then complete the Add User Account Wizard.
6. Check to enable remote access if the family member wants to access the home network from outside of the home.
7. Repeat for each user account that you want to add.
Guest account disabled
If you want everyone to use the same logon account to access the HP MediaSmart Server, enable the guest account. If the guest account is enabled with no password, family members are not required to logon when they use home computers. Additionally, all family members can have Full access to all shared folders through the guest account.
Note
If you enable the guest account, everyone that connects to your home network has the same privileges. That may mean that they all have full access to shared folders and other resources on your server. The guest account cannot be used to access the server from outside of the home using remote access.
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click the User Accounts tab.
4. The User Accounts Setup dialog displays. Click Enable Guest. See picture in step 5 above.
Media Type is not Enabled for Collection
The HP MediaSmart Server may not be set up to scan for photos, music, or videos. Check your
HP Media Collector settings to make sure the media type is configured for collection.
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click Settings.
4. Click Media Collector in the left menu of the Windows Home Server Settings dialog.
251
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
5. Click the Photos, Music, or Videos tab.
6. Check that the media collection status is set to Enabled.
7. Click OK.
Home Computer is not Included as a Scanned Computer
The HP MediaSmart Server may not be set up to scan one of your network computers. Check your HP Media Collector settings to make sure all of your home computers are included.
1. At the computer, double-click the Windows Home Server icon in the system tray.
2. Log on to the Windows Home Server Console.
3. Click Settings.
4. Click Media Collector in the left menu of the Windows Home Server Settings dialog.
252
Troubleshooting & FAQs
5. On the General Settings tab, check that all of the necessary computers are Included in the
Scanned Computers list.
6. Click OK.
Why my Files Do Not Show Up on DMA?
•
•
•
If some of your files (e.g., files newly copied to the server) are not found by the DMA.
Digital Media Adapters (DMA, or Digital Media Receivers - DMR ) use the Universal Plug 'n Play
( UPnP ) protocol to automatically discover Digital Media Servers (DMS). The HP MediaSmart
Server uses Windows Media Connect 2.0 (WMC) as its DMS. In order for a DMA to discover the
HP MediaSmart Server and access its content, WMC must be enabled. WMC defaults to being disabled; it is automatically enabled for all DMAs when the server administrator selects one or more of the three media shared folders (Music, Photos and Videos) for media sharing. On your
DMA, you should then see the HP MediaSmart Server listed as:
<YourServerName>: 1 : Windows Media Connect
Note
Some DMAs aggregate the content from all DMSs into a single view; in such a case you may not be able to identify each DMS individually. Further troubleshooting steps form DMA follow:
253
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Once WMC has been enabled to share a shared folder, it continually monitors the folder for new files.
1. Open the Control Center on one of your home PCs.
2. Select the Tools tab at the bottom.
3. On the Tools tab, click on the Home Server Console (HSC) icon.
4. On the HSC password screen, type in the Administrator's password.
5. When the HSC comes up, click on the Settings button near the top right.
6. In the left pane of the Settings panel, select Media Sharing .
7. In the right pane of the Settings panel, you must now select at least one of the shared folders for sharing by selecting the On radio button.
8. Click Apply.
This will automatically start WMC, which will then share all of the files in the selected shared folders.
If your DMA does not display WMC from the HP MediaSmart
Server, or none of your files are found by the DMA.
1. Check that WMC is enabled (use the above steps to get to the Media Sharing settings, and verify that at least one of the shared folders is On).
Check that the HP MediaSmart Server and DMA are both connected to the same home network (a router or firewall between them could interfere with the discovery and content sharing protocols).
2. Restart the DMA.
3. Restart the HP Media Smart server.
If some of your files (e.g., files newly copied to the server) are not found by the DMA.
1. Check that the files were copied to the correct location. Only the Music, Photos and Videos shared folders may be enabled for media sharing. Note that if one of these folders is enabled for media sharing; then all folders below that are also enabled for media sharing.
2. Re-enable the shared folder for media sharing.
• Go to the Media Sharing Settings panel (see the instructions above for how to get here).
• Turn sharing Off for the shared folder with the missing files and select Apply.
• Turn sharing back On for the shared folder and select Apply.
3. Restart the DMA.
4. Restart the HP Media Smart server.
254
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Media Files (Audio/Video) of Supported Format Aren't Seen by Device.
Possible naming convention issues.
Double check names on server, make sure they start with a letter, and not a number or symbol.
Windows Media Connect 2.0 and TwonkyMedia
Comparison
The following tables provide a detailed comparison of Windows Media Connect 2.0 and
TwonkyMedia features.
At a high level, TwonkyMedia
• Allows your digital media adaptor or digital media receiver to see photo thumbnails for pictures and album artwork for music
• Supports a lot more media formats
General Features
Comparison of General Windows Media Connect and TwonkyMedia Features
Feature
DLNA Support
Windows Media Connect 2.0
Some Capability
TwonkyMedia
1.0 compliant
1.5 reference
User Controlled Number of
Shared
Folders
Shared Folders/Media
Types
Music
Photos
Videos
Music/all media types
Photos/all media types
Videos/all media types
Album Art/Thumbnail
Support
Picture Scaling
Video Trick Modes
Limited
No
Music/music media types
Photos/all media types
Videos/video media types
User selectable folders/media types
Music album art
Photo thumbnails
JPG_MED support
Yes
255
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Comparison of General Windows Media Connect and TwonkyMedia Features
Feature Windows Media Connect 2.0 TwonkyMedia
Server Side Shuffle
Status/Summary User
Interface
Folder Monitoring
DMR
Exclusion
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Views
Comparison of Windows Media Connect and TwonkyMedia Views
Views
Music Views
Album
All Tracks
Artist
Artist Index
Windows Media Connect 2.0
X
X
X
X
TwonkyMedia
X
X
Artist/Folder X
Folder X X
Genre
Genre Index
X
X
X
X
Genre/Artist X
Playlist X X
X Year/Artist
Picture Views
Album
All Photos
X
X X
Date X (flat) X (hierarchal)
Folder X X
256
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Comparison of Windows Media Connect and TwonkyMedia Views
Views Windows Media Connect 2.0 TwonkyMedia
Playlist
Video Views
X
Actor X
Album X
All Videos X
Folder X
Genre X
Playlist X
File Formats
Comparison of Windows Media Connect and TwonkyMedia File Formats
File Formats Windows Media Connect 2.0 TwonkyMedia
Music Formats
3gp ac3 aiff
X
X
X asf X
FLAC
LPCM m4a mp1 mp2 mp3 X mp4 mpa ogg
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
257
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Comparison of Windows Media Connect and TwonkyMedia File Formats
File Formats Windows Media Connect 2.0 TwonkyMedia wav X wma X
Picture Formats bmp X
X
X
X gif X jpg/jpeg X png X tif/tiff X
Video Formats
3gp asf avi X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
DivX dvr-ms X m1v m4v mpe mpg/mpeg X
MPEG-1 X
MPEG-2 X
MPEG2-TS
MPEG-4 vdr vob wmv X
Xvid
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
258
Troubleshooting & FAQs
Comparison of Windows Media Connect and TwonkyMedia File Formats
File Formats Windows Media Connect 2.0 TwonkyMedia
Playlist Formats m3u X pls wpl X
X
X
X
Why do I see duplicate songs, pictures, or videos on my
DMA list?
If you are streaming content from shared folders using both Windows Media Connect and
TwonkyMedia, you may see duplicate entries of your songs, pictures, or videos on your digital media adaptor. To eliminate this problem, disable media sharing for one of the shared folders.
For additional information on these programs, see Windows Media Connect 2.0 and
To disable a shared folder in Windows Media Connect 2.0
1. At the computer, click Start, All Programs, and then select HP MediaSmart Server.
2. In the Control Center, click the MediaSmart tab.
3. Click Settings in the upper right corner.
259
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
4. Click Media Sharing in the left menu.
5. On the right side under Media Sharing Library, click Off for the shared folders that you do not want to use for streaming content using Windows Media Connect.
6. Click OK.
For additional information on using Windows Media Connect, see Media Sharing in the Windows
Home Server help.
To disable a shared folder in TwonkyMedia
1. At the computer, click Start , All Programs , and then select HP MediaSmart Server .
2. Click the TwonkyMedia tab.
260
3. Click Media Server Settings on the menu bar.
Troubleshooting & FAQs
4. On the Media Sharing Photos tab on the right side, select a shared folder and click Remove for each folder that you do not want to use for streaming content using TwonkyMedia.
5. Click OK.
For additional information on using TwonkyMedia, click Help while on the TwonkyMedia tab of the Windows Home Server Console or click Help on any of the TwonkyMedia dialog boxes.
Why does HP MediaSmart Server show up twice on my
DMA list?
If you are running both Windows Media Connect and TwonkyMedia, they will both show up when you view menus on your digital media adaptor.
Once you turn on media sharing using Windows Media Connect, this program will always display the HP MediaSmart Server in your digital media adaptor list. However, you can disable media sharing for the folders under the HP MediaSmart Server. See Why do I see duplicate songs, pictures, or videos on my DMA list? for information on disabling media sharing for shared folders.
Alternately, you can turn off TwonkyMedia media sharing and remove the duplicate HP
MediaSmart Server from your digital media adaptor list. See the steps below.
For additional information on these programs, see Windows Media Connect 2.0 and
261
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
To turn off TwonkyMedia media sharing
1. At the computer, click Start, All Programs, and then select HP MediaSmart Server.
2. In the Control Center, click the MediaSmart Server tab.
3. Click TwonkyMedia in the left navigation.
4. Click Stop Sharing.
262
Chapter 14.
Product Information
P
RODUCT
S
PECIFICATIONS
The product specifications contain information about the HP MediaSmart Server, its requirements, and standards.
•
Minimum Client-computer Requirements
•
HP MediaSmart Server Specifications
•
•
•
Minimum Client-computer Requirements
One or more computers that meet or exceed these requirements:
Computer Requirements
Any computer capable of running the supported operating systems listed in the following table.
Operating Systems
Windows Vista
Supported Operating Systems
Windows XP
Mac OS X
Windows Vista Home Basic with
Service Pack 1 (SP1)
Windows XP Home with Service
Pack 2 (SP2)
Mac OS X 10.5 or later
Windows Vista Home Basic 64bit with SP1
Windows Vista Home Premium with SP1
Windows Vista Home Premium
64-bit with SP1
Windows Vista Ultimate with
SP1
Windows XP Professional with
SP2
Windows XP Home with SP3
Windows XP Professional with
SP3
Windows XP Media Center
Edition 2005 with SP2 and
Rollup 2
263
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Windows Vista a
Windows Vista Ultimate 64-bit with SP1
Supported Operating Systems
Windows XP b
Windows XP Media Center
Edition 2004 with SP2
Mac OS X a. Remote access is not supported by Windows Vista Home (all versions); the Business,
Enterprise, and Ultimate versions of Windows Vista support remote access. For more information, see Why can't I connect to some computers? in the Windows Home Server Console Help. b. Windows XP Professional and Windows XP Media Center Editions support remote access.
Windows XP Home does not support remote access.
Client-computer Hard Drive
25 MB free for software installation on client computers
Other Client-computer Requirements
CD-ROM drive for client-computer installation
DVD-ROM drive for Server Recovery
HP MediaSmart Server Specifications
Internal drive storage
750 GB (EX485)
1.5 TB (EX487)
Drive expandability
3 Serial ATA expansion bays (EX485)
2 Serial ATA expansion bays (EX487)
4 USB 2.0 ports
1 eSATA port
Maximum storage space: unlimited
Dimensions
Width: 14cm (5.5")
Height: 25cm (9.8")
Depth: 23cm (base)-25cm (top) (9.2"-9.5”)
264
Product Information
Weight
EX485: 5.2 kg (11.4 lb.)
EX487: 5.8 kg (12.7 lb.)
Network Information
Default Network Name
HPSERVER
Network Requirements
Requirement
Server connection
Home computers
Internet Connection
Router
Connector types
Ethernet: RJ45 eSATA: I-Type
Maximum transmission distances
Ethernet: 100 meters eSATA: 2 meters
USB: 5 meters
Network Requirements
Recommended
100 Mbps to 1000 Mbps (Gigabit Ethernet) wired connection.
One or more computers running a supported operating system with a wired or wireless network connection.
Broadband connection, such as DSL or cable, required for remote access functionality.
An external Internet broadband router with 100
Mbps (or faster) Ethernet connection to the server for remote access functionality and wired or wireless connections to the computers on the network.
Additionally, your router must have DHCP enabled to provide automatic IP address to the server.
265
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Browser
Internet Explorer 6.0 or greater
Netscape 8.0 or greater
Firefox 2.0 or greater
Safari 3.0 and greater (Mac only)
Environmental
Temperature
Operating: 5 to 35 °C (4 to 95 °F)
Nonoperating: –30 to 65 °C (–22 to 149 °F)
Humidity (no condensation allowed)
Operating: 15% to 90% RH
Nonoperating: 5% to 95% RH
Shock
Nonoperating: 85 G
Vibration
Operating: 0.2 Grms
Nonoperating: 2.1 Grms
Electrical and Power
Electrical Ratings
AC input 100–127V ~5A max or 200–240V ~3A max, 50/60Hz
Power Consumption
Number of drives
1 (EX485) 1
Power Consumption
Sleep Mode
(Watts)
Idle
(Watts)
44 50
Active Data
(Watts)
266
Product Information
2 (EX487) 1 55 60
4 1
Safety
IEC 950-compliant
USA – UL, CDRH Radiation Control Standards 21
CFR 1010 and 1020-1 0.50
Canada – CSA or CUL
Europe – LVD 73/23/EEC 93/68/EC
IEC 60950-1 plus amendments
EN60825 plus amendments
76 81
R
EGULATORY
S
TATEMENTS
The HP MediaSmart Server complies to the following:
•
Federal Communications Commission Notice
•
•
•
Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo (United States only)
•
California Perchlorate Material Notice
•
•
•
•
•
European Union Regulatory Notice
•
Federal Communications Commission Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can
267
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help.
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett-Packard Company may void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Cables
Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI/EMI connector hoods in order to maintain compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations.
Declaration of Conformity for Products Marked with the FCC Logo
(United States only)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
For questions regarding the product, contact:
Hewlett-Packard Company
P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 530113
Houston, Texas 77269-2000
Or, call 1-800-HP-INVENT (1-800-474-6836).
268
Product Information
For questions regarding this FCC declaration, contact:
Hewlett-Packard Company
P. O. Box 692000, Mail Stop 510101
Houston, Texas 77269-2000
Or, call (281) 514-3333.
To identify this product, refer to the part, series, or model number found on the product.
California Perchlorate Material Notice
Perchlorate material - special handling may apply See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
This product’s real-time clock battery or coin cell battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed of in California.
Canadian Notice
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Avis Canadien
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
WEEE Declaration
Disposal of Waste Equipment by Users in Private Household in the European
Union
This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product.
269
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
REACH Statement
Chemical Substances
HP is committed to providing our customers with information about the chemical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH (Regulation EC No
1907/2006 of the European Parliament and the Council). A chemical information report for this product can be found at: http://www.hp.com/go/reach
European Union Regulatory Notice
This product complies with the following EU Directives:
• Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
• EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards (European Norms) which are listed on the EU Declaration of Conformity issued by
Hewlett-Packard for this product or product family.
This compliance is indicated by the following conformity marking placed on the product:
Hewlett-Packard GmbH, HQ-TRE, Herrenberger Strasse 140, 71034 Boeblingen, Germany
Japanese Notice
WM-DRM 10 L
ICENSED
T
ECHNOLOGY
Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (“WM-DRM”) to protect the integrity of their content (“Secure Content”) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM Software to play Secure Content (“WM-DRM Software”). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content
(“Secure Content Owners”) may request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software’s right to
270
Product Information acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the
WM-DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocations lists onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
L
IMITED
W
ARRANTY AND
T
ECHNICAL
S
UPPORT
S
TATEMENT
HP MediaSmart Server Limited Warranty
Duration
Hardware: 1 year Limited Warranty
Software: 1 year Technical Support
General Terms
This HP Hardware Limited Warranty gives you, the customer, express limited warranty rights from HP, the manufacturer. Please refer to HP’s Web site for an extensive description of your limited warranty entitlements. In addition, you may also have other legal rights under applicable local law or special written agreement with HP.
HP MAKES NO OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN
OR ORAL, AND HP EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS
NOT STATED IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY THE
LOCAL LAW OF JURISDICTIONS OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES, HP DISCLAIMS ALL
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FOR ALL
TRANSACTIONS OCCURRING IN THE UNITED STATES, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY
OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, OR FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS
WARRANTY SET FORTH ABOVE. SOME STATES OR COUNTRIES/REGIONS DO NOT
ALLOW A LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS OR THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR
CONSUMER PRODUCTS. IN SUCH STATES OR COUNTRIES/REGIONS, SOME
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
THE LIMITED WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO
THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT, OR MODIFY
BUT ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO
THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
This Limited Warranty is applicable in all countries/regions and may be enforced in any country/region where HP or its authorized service providers offer warranty service for the same product model number subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Limited Warranty.
Under the HP Global Limited Warranty program, products purchased in one country/region may be transferred to another country/region, where HP or its authorized service providers offer warranty service for the same product model number, without voiding the warranty. Warranty terms, service availability, and service response times may vary from country/region to
271
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide country/region. Standard warranty service response time is subject to change due to local parts availability. If so, your HP authorized service provider can provide you with details.
HP is not responsible for any tariffs or duties that may be incurred in transferring the products.
Transfer of the products may be covered by export controls issued by the United States or other governments.
This Limited Warranty applies only to HP-branded and Compaq-branded hardware products
(collectively referred to in this Limited Warranty as “HP Hardware Products”) sold by or leased from Hewlett-Packard Company, its worldwide subsidiaries, affiliates, authorized resellers, or country/region distributors (collectively referred to in this Limited Warranty as “HP”) with this
Limited Warranty. The term “HP Hardware Product” is limited to the hardware components and required firmware. The term “HP Hardware Product” DOES NOT include any software applications or programs; non-HP products or non-HP branded peripherals. All non-HP products or non-HP branded peripherals external to the HP Hardware Product — such as external storage subsystems, displays, printers, and other peripherals — are provided “AS IS” without HP warranty. However, non-HP manufacturers and suppliers, or publishers may provide their own warranties directly to you.
HP warrants that the HP Hardware Products that you have purchased or leased from HP are free from defects in materials or workmanship under normal use during the Limited Warranty Period.
The Limited Warranty Period starts on the date of purchase or lease from HP or from the date HP completes installation. Your dated sales or delivery receipt, showing the date of purchase or lease of the product, is your proof of the purchase or lease date. You may be required to provide proof of purchase or lease as a condition of receiving warranty service. You are entitled to hardware warranty service according to the terms and conditions of this document if a repair to your HP
Hardware Product is required within the Limited Warranty Period.
Unless otherwise stated, and to the extent permitted by local law, new HP Hardware Products may be manufactured using new materials or new and used materials equivalent to new in performance and reliability. HP may repair or replace HP Hardware Products (a) with new or previously used products or parts equivalent to new in performance and reliability or (b) with equivalent products to an original product that has been discontinued. Replacement parts are warranted to be free from defects in material or workmanship for ninety (90) days or, for the remainder of the Limited
Warranty Period of the HP Hardware Product they are replacing or in which they are installed, whichever is longer.
During the Limited Warranty Period, HP will, at its discretion, repair or replace any defective component. All component parts or hardware products removed under this Limited Warranty become the property of HP. In the unlikely event that your HP Hardware Product has recurring failures, HP, at its sole discretion, may elect to provide you with (a) a replacement unit of HP’s choosing that is the same or equivalent to your HP Hardware Product in performance or (b) to give you a refund of your purchase price or lease payments (less interest) instead of a replacement. This is your exclusive remedy for defective products.
Exclusions
HP does not warrant that the operation of this product will be uninterrupted or error-free. HP is not responsible for damage that occurs as a result of your failure to follow the instructions intended for the HP Hardware Product.
This Limited Warranty does not apply to expendable or consumable parts and does not extend to any product from which the serial number has been removed or that has been damaged or rendered defective (a) as a result of accident, misuse, abuse, contamination, improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, or other external causes; (b) by operation outside the usage parameters stated in the user documentation that shipped with the product (c) by software, interfacing, parts,
272
Product Information or supplies not supplied by HP; (d) by improper site preparation or maintenance; (e) by virus infection; (f) from loss or damage in transit; (g) by modification or service by anyone other than
(i) HP, (ii) an HP authorized service provider, or (iii) your own installation of end-user-replaceable
HP or HP-approved parts if available for your product in the servicing country/region.
YOU SHOULD MAKE PERIODIC BACKUP COPIES OF THE DATA STORED ON
YOUR HARD DRIVE OR OTHER STORAGE DEVICES AS A PRECAUTION AGAINST
POSSIBLE FAILURES, ALTERATION, OR LOSS OF THE DATA. BEFORE
RETURNING ANY UNIT FOR SERVICE, BE SURE TO BACK UP DATA AND
REMOVE ANY CONFIDENTIAL, PROPRIETARY, OR PERSONAL INFORMATION.
HP IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE TO OR LOSS OF ANY PROGRAMS, DATA,
OR REMOVABLE STORAGE MEDIA. HP IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR THE
RESTORATION OR REINSTALLATION OF ANY PROGRAMS OR DATA OTHER
THAN SOFTWARE INSTALLED BY HP WHEN THE PRODUCT IS MANUFACTURED.
UNITS SENT IN FOR SERVICE MAY HAVE THE DATA ERASED FROM THE HARD
DRIVE AND THE PROGRAMS RESTORED TO THEIR ORIGINAL STATE.
Exclusive Remedy
TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LOCAL LAW, THESE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS CONSTITUTE THE COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND HP REGARDING THE HP HARDWARE PRODUCT
YOU HAVE PURCHASED OR LEASED. THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SUPERSEDE
ANY PRIOR AGREEMENTS OR REPRESENTATIONS — INCLUDING
REPRESENTATIONS MADE IN HP SALES LITERATURE OR ADVICE GIVEN TO YOU
BY HP OR AN AGENT OR EMPLOYEE OF HP — THAT MAY HAVE BEEN MADE IN
CONNECTION WITH YOUR PURCHASE OR LEASE OF THE HP HARDWARE PRODUCT.
No change to the conditions of this Limited Warranty is valid unless it is made in writing and signed by an authorized representative of HP.
Limitation of Liability
IF YOUR HP HARDWARE PRODUCT FAILS TO WORK AS WARRANTED ABOVE, HP’S
MAXIMUM LIABILITY UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED
TO THE LESSER OF THE PRICE YOU HAVE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT OR THE COST
OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY HARDWARE COMPONENTS THAT
MALFUNCTION IN CONDITIONS OF NORMAL USE.
EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE PRODUCT OR THE FAILURE OF THE PRODUCT TO
PERFORM, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. HP IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM MADE BY A
THIRD PARTY OR MADE BY YOU FOR A THIRD PARTY.
THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY APPLIES WHETHER DAMAGES ARE SOUGHT, OR A
CLAIM MADE, UNDER THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR AS A TORT CLAIM
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT PRODUCT LIABILITY), A CONTRACT
CLAIM, OR ANY OTHER CLAIM. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY CANNOT BE
WAIVED OR AMENDED BY ANY PERSON. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY WILL BE
EFFECTIVE EVEN IF YOU HAVE ADVISED HP OR AN AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE OF HP OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ANY SUCH DAMAGES. THIS
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, HOWEVER, WILL NOT APPLY TO CLAIMS FOR
PERSONAL INJURY.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS. YOU MAY ALSO
HAVE OTHER RIGHTS THAT MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE OR FROM
273
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
COUNTRY/REGION TO COUNTRY/REGION. YOU ARE ADVISED TO CONSULT
APPLICABLE STATE OR COUNTRY/REGION LAWS FOR A FULL DETERMINATION OF
YOUR RIGHTS.
Limited Warranty Period
The Limited Warranty Period for an HP Hardware Product is a specified, fixed period commencing on the date of purchase. The date on your sales receipt is the date of purchase unless
HP or your reseller informs you otherwise in writing.
Types of Warranty Service
To enable HP to provide the best possible support and service during the Limited Warranty
Period, you may be directed by HP to verify configurations, load most recent firmware, patches, run HP diagnostics tests, or use HP remote support solutions where applicable.
HP strongly encourages you to accept the use of or to employ available support technologies provided by HP. If you choose not to deploy available remote support capabilities, you may incur additional costs due to increased support resource requirements. Listed below are the types of warranty support service that may be applicable to the HP Hardware Product you have purchased.
Customer Self Repair Warranty Service
In countries/regions where it is available, your HP Limited Warranty may include a customer self repair warranty service. If applicable, HP will determine in its sole discretion that customer self repair is the appropriate method of warranty service. If so, HP will ship approved replacement parts directly to you to fulfill your HP Hardware Product warranty service. This will save considerable repair time. After you contact the HP Technical Support Center and the fault diagnosis identifies that the problem can be fixed using one of these parts, a replaceable part can be sent directly to you. Once the part arrives, replace the defective part pursuant to the provided instructions and documentation. If further assistance is required, call the HP Technical Support
Center, and a technician will assist you over the phone. In cases where the replacement part must be returned to HP, you must ship the defective part back to HP within a defined period of time, normally thirty (30) days. The defective part must be returned with the associated documentation in the provided shipping material. Failure to return the defective product may result in HP billing you for the replacement.
With a customer self repair, HP will pay all shipping and part return costs and determine the courier/carrier to be used. If customer self repair applies to you, please refer to your specific HP
Hardware Product announcement. You can also obtain information on this warranty service on the
HP Web site at: http://www.hp.com/support
Pickup and Return Warranty Service
Your HP Limited Warranty may include a pickup and return warranty service. Under the terms of pickup and return service, HP will pick up the defective unit from your location, repair it, and return it back to your location. HP will incur all repair, logistics, and insurance costs in this process.
Carry-in Warranty Service
Under the terms of carry-in service, you will be required to deliver your HP Hardware Product to an authorized service location for warranty repair. You must prepay any shipping charges, taxes, or duties associated with transportation of the product to and from the service location. In addition,
274
Product Information you are responsible for insuring any product shipped or returned to an authorized service location and assume risk of loss during shipping.
Service Upgrades
HP has a range of additional support and service coverage for your product that can be purchased locally. However, some support and related products may not be available in all countries/regions.
For information on availability of service upgrades and the cost for these service upgrades, refer to the HP Web site at: http://www.hp.com/support
Options Limited Warranty, Software and Digital Content
Your Options Limited Warranty is a one (1) year (HP Options Limited Warranty Period) parts replacement warranty on any HP branded or Compaq-branded options (HP Options). If your HP
Options are installed in an HP Hardware Product, HP may provide warranty service either for the
HP Options Limited Warranty Period or the remaining Limited Warranty Period of the HP
Hardware Product in which the HP Options are being installed, whichever period is the longer but not to exceed three (3) years from the date you purchased the HP Options. The HP Options
Limited Warranty Period starts on your date of purchase. Your dated sales or delivery receipt, showing the date of purchase, is your start date. Non-HP options are provided “AS IS”. Non-HP manufacturers and suppliers may provide warranties directly to you. EXCEPT AS PROVIDED IN
ANY SOFTWARE END-USER LICENSE OR PROGRAM LICENSE AGREEMENT, OR IF
OTHERWISE REQUIRED BY LOCAL LAW, SOFTWARE AND THIRD PARTY DIGITAL
CONTENT, INCLUDING THE OPERATING SYSTEM OR ANY SOFTWARE OR THIRD
PARTY DIGITAL CONTENT PREINSTALLED BY HP ARE PROVIDED “AS IS”. EXCEPT
AS SPECIFICALLY PROVIDED IN THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, IN NO EVENT WILL HP
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY OR ARISING FROM ANY THIRD PARTY
DIGITAL CONTENT PREINSTALLED ON YOUR HP HARDWARE PRODUCT.
HP M
EDIA
S
MART
S
ERVER
2.5
U
PDATE
R
EAD ME
As always, the HP MediaSmart Server helps you centralize, organize, and share your digital content. The 2.5 update improves on existing HP MediaSmart Server features, making them even more robust. Additionally, new features were added to make your music, photos, and videos more mobile than ever before. With the HP MediaSmart Server, your media is where you are…wherever you are. Read on to discover what's new!
HP Video Converter
The HP MediaSmart Server automatically converts your video library (including unprotected
DVDs) into a format that will play in the home and remotely on PCs, Macs, XBox 360s,
PlayStation 3s, and other popular media streaming devices. The video converter transcodes many popular video formats into an MPEG-4 video file using an H.264 video codec and AAC stereo audio codec with both original and mobile resolutions. The original video resolution streams to most devices attached to your home network including PCs, Macs, and gaming systems. The mobile video resolution streams remotely to your PC or Mac using a secure remote log on to your server and can be copied to popular mobile devices.
HP Media Streamer for Videos
The HP Media Streamer always supported music and photos. Now it supports videos!
275
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Whether you are at home, on campus, at work, or visiting friends and family, you can use a web browser and your HP MediaSmart Server personal web address to securely log on to your server and use Media Streamer to stream music, photos, and videos to wherever you are. No additional player is required. Media Streamer does it all—it streams your media and offers several playback options.
MediaSmart Server iPhone Application
The MediaSmart Server iPhone application is a free download that allows you to securely stream photo, music, and video libraries from your home server to your iPhone or iPod Touch. And since your MediaSmart Server is designed to stay on 24/7, all of your media files are now just a fingertip away. Wireless or 3G connection is recommended for best performance. The iPhone application is only supported on EX 487 and EX 485 HP MediaSmart Servers.
Defect Fixes and Enhancements
The following defect fixes and enhancements are included in this update.
1. Public and private capabilities were added to HP Photo Viewer albums.
2. Made a number of improvements to the Mac Backup feature, including the ability to resize the backup disk.
3. Fixed a number of TwonkyMedia server issues, including the case where songs would not play all the way through.
4. Improved the HP Media Streamer interface, including adding support for streaming video files,
column sort functionality, and new album art views. See HP_Media_Streamer_for_Videos above.
5. Added streaming support for iPhone. See MediaSmart_Server_iPhone_Application above.
6. Added the HP Video Converter which transcodes common video formats to an H.264 video codec and AAC stereo audio code. See
7. Improved Media Collector by displaying progress details, status information, and client connectivity to shared folders.
8. Improved The HP MediaSmart Server dashboard functionality.
9. The User's Guide was updated to match HP MediaSmart Server software changes.
276
Chapter 15.
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open
Source Components
F
LICKR
J:
S
OFTWARE
L
ICENSE
A
GREEMENT
(BSD L
ICENSE
)
Copyright (c) 2006, Yahoo! Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use of this software in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of Yahoo! Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission of Yahoo!
Inc.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
F
ACEBOOK
J
AVA
API: T
HE
MIT L
ICENSE
Copyright (c) 2009 <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense,
277
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
G
DATA
J
AVA
C
LIENT
: A
PACHE
L
ICENSE
Apache Organization Components: Axis2; Apache Commons: Beanutils, Codec, Discovery,
FileUpload, HTTPClient, IO, Logging; Tomcat
Maverick
Spring Framework
StAX
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this
278
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components
License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a
Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this
License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or
Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the
Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a
Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions: a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this
License; and
279
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and d. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative
Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the
License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each
280
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components
Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
JCIFS : GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC
LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU
Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
281
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library.
The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C
Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
282
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
1. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.
For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library
(independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does.
2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
3. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a. The modified work must itself be a software library.
283
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide b. You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c. You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d. If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this
License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this
License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to
284
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the
Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License.
Also, you must do one of these things: a. Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions. b. Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c. Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution.
285
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide d. If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e. Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a. Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b. Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you,
286
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
287
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
F
IREFLY
: GPL L
ICENSE
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software
(and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
288
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
1. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The
"Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".)
Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the
Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
2. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
289
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
3. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of
Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a. You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b. You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c. If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this
License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a. Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b. Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c. Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it.
For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it
290
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License
291
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public
License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY
FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU
ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
I
MAGE
M
AGICK
: C
OMPATIBLE WITH
GPL
Before we get to the text of the license lets just review what the license says in simple terms:
It allows you to:
292
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components
• freely download and use ImageMagick software, in whole or in part, for personal, company internal, or commercial purposes;
• use ImageMagick software in packages or distributions that you create.
It forbids you to:
• redistribute any piece of ImageMagick-originated software without proper attribution;
• use any marks owned by ImageMagick Studio LLC in any way that might state or imply that
ImageMagick Studio LLC endorses your distribution;
• use any marks owned by ImageMagick Studio LLC in any way that might state or imply that you created the ImageMagick software in question.
It requires you to:
• include a copy of the license in any redistribution you may make that includes ImageMagick software;
• provide clear attribution to ImageMagick Studio LLC for any distributions that include
ImageMagick software.
It does not require you to:
• include the source of the ImageMagick software itself, or of any modifications you may have made to it, in any redistribution you may assemble that includes it;
• submit changes that you make to the software back to the ImageMagick Studio LLC (though such feedback is encouraged).
A few other clarifications include:
• ImageMagick is freely available without charge; you may include ImageMagick on a DVD as long as you comply with the terms of the license;
• you can give modified code away for free or sell it under the terms of the ImageMagick license or distribute the result under a different license, but you need to acknowledge the use of the
ImageMagick software;
• the license is compatible with the GPL.
The legally binding and authoritative terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution of ImageMagick follow:
Copyright 1999-2007 ImageMagick Studio LLC, a non-profit organization dedicated to making software imaging solutions freely available.
1. Definitions.
License shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
Licensor shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
Legal Entity shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are
293
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition,
control means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
You (or Your) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this
License.
Source form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
Object form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a
Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
Work shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
Derivative Works shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this
License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
Contribution shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or
Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, submitted means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication intentionally sent to the Licensor by its copyright holder or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as Not a Contribution.
Contributor shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a
Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each
Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that
You meet the following conditions:
294
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this
License; and b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and d. If the Work includes a NOTICE text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative
Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the
License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an AS IS BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
295
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative
Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License.
T
ASK
S
CHEDULER
: T
HE
C
ODE
P
ROJECT
O
PEN
L
ICENSE
(CPOL) 1.02
Preamble
This License governs Your use of the Work. This License is intended to allow developers to use the Source Code and Executable Files provided as part of the Work in any application in any form.
The main points subject to the terms of the License are:
• Source Code and Executable Files can be used in commercial applications;
• Source Code and Executable Files can be redistributed; and
• Source Code can be modified to create derivative works.
• No claim of suitability, guarantee, or any warranty whatsoever is provided. The software is provided "as-is".
• The Article accompanying the Work may not be distributed or republished without the Author's consent
This License is entered between You, the individual or other entity reading or otherwise making use of the Work licensed pursuant to this License and the individual or other entity which offers the Work under the terms of this License ("Author").
License
THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS CODE
PROJECT OPEN LICENSE ("LICENSE"). THE WORK IS PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT
AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW. ANY USE OF THE WORK OTHER THAN AS
AUTHORIZED UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS PROHIBITED.
BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HEREIN, YOU ACCEPT AND
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE AUTHOR GRANTS YOU
THE RIGHTS CONTAINED HEREIN IN CONSIDERATION OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF
SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ACCEPT AND BE
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE, YOU CANNOT MAKE ANY USE OF THE
WORK.
1. Definitions. a. "Articles" means, collectively, all articles written by Author which describes how the
Source Code and Executable Files for the Work may be used by a user. b. "Author" means the individual or entity that offers the Work under the terms of this
License.
296
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components c. "Derivative Work" means a work based upon the Work or upon the Work and other preexisting works. d. "Executable Files" refer to the executables, binary files, configuration and any required data files included in the Work. e. "Publisher" means the provider of the web site, magazine, CD-ROM, DVD or other medium from or by which the Work is obtained by You. f. "Source Code" refers to the collection of source code and configuration files used to create the Executable Files. g. "Standard Version" refers to such a Work if it has not been modified, or has been modified in accordance with the consent of the Author, such consent being in the full discretion of the Author. h. "Work" refers to the collection of files distributed by the Publisher, including the Source
Code, Executable Files, binaries, data files, documentation, whitepapers and the Articles. i. "You" is you, an individual or entity wishing to use the Work and exercise your rights under this License.
2. Fair Use/Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this License is intended to reduce, limit, or restrict any rights arising from fair use, fair dealing, first sale or other limitations on the exclusive rights of the copyright owner under copyright law or other applicable laws.
3. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, the Author hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated below: a. You may use the standard version of the Source Code or Executable Files in Your own applications. b. You may apply bug fixes, portability fixes and other modifications obtained from the
Public Domain or from the Author. A Work modified in such a way shall still be considered the standard version and will be subject to this License. c. You may otherwise modify Your copy of this Work (excluding the Articles) in any way to create a Derivative Work, provided that You insert a prominent notice in each changed file stating how, when and where You changed that file. d. You may distribute the standard version of the Executable Files and Source Code or
Derivative Work in aggregate with other (possibly commercial) programs as part of a larger (possibly commercial) software distribution. e. The Articles discussing the Work published in any form by the author may not be distributed or republished without the Author's consent. The author retains copyright to any such Articles. You may use the Executable Files and Source Code pursuant to this
License but you may not repost or republish or otherwise distribute or make available the
Articles, without the prior written consent of the Author.
Any subroutines or modules supplied by You and linked into the Source Code or Executable Files this Work shall not be considered part of this Work and will not be subject to the terms of this
License.
4. Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Author hereby grants to
You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, import, and otherwise transfer the Work.
297
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
5. Restrictions. The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly made subject to and limited by the following restrictions: a. You agree not to remove any of the original copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices and associated disclaimers that may appear in the Source Code or Executable
Files. b. You agree not to advertise or in any way imply that this Work is a product of Your own. c. The name of the Author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from the Work without the prior written consent of the Author. d. You agree not to sell, lease, or rent any part of the Work. This does not restrict you from including the Work or any part of the Work inside a larger software distribution that itself is being sold. The Work by itself, though, cannot be sold, leased or rented. e. You may distribute the Executable Files and Source Code only under the terms of this
License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource Identifier for, this
License with every copy of the Executable Files or Source Code You distribute and ensure that anyone receiving such Executable Files and Source Code agrees that the terms of this License apply to such Executable Files and/or Source Code. You may not offer or impose any terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of this License or the recipients' exercise of the rights granted hereunder. You may not sublicense the
Work. You must keep intact all notices that refer to this License and to the disclaimer of warranties. You may not distribute the Executable Files or Source Code with any technological measures that control access or use of the Work in a manner inconsistent with the terms of this License. f. You agree not to use the Work for illegal, immoral or improper purposes, or on pages containing illegal, immoral or improper material. The Work is subject to applicable export laws. You agree to comply with all such laws and regulations that may apply to the Work after Your receipt of the Work.
6. Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer. THIS WORK IS PROVIDED "AS IS", "WHERE
IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE", WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
CONDITIONS OR GUARANTEES. YOU, THE USER, ASSUME ALL RISK IN ITS USE,
INCLUDING COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, PATENT INFRINGEMENT, SUITABILITY,
ETC. AUTHOR EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY
WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES
OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, MERCHANTABLE QUALITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR ANY WARRANTY OF TITLE OR NON-
INFRINGEMENT, OR THAT THE WORK (OR ANY PORTION THEREOF) IS CORRECT,
USEFUL, BUG-FREE OR FREE OF VIRUSES. YOU MUST PASS THIS DISCLAIMER ON
WHENEVER YOU DISTRIBUTE THE WORK OR DERIVATIVE WORKS.
7. Indemnity. You agree to defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Author and the Publisher from and against any claims, suits, losses, damages, liabilities, costs, and expenses (including reasonable legal or attorneys’ fees) resulting from or relating to any use of the Work by You.
8. Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN
NO EVENT WILL THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER BE LIABLE TO YOU ON ANY
LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE USE OF THE WORK
OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF THE AUTHOR OR THE PUBLISHER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
9. Termination.
298
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components a. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically upon any breach by You of any term of this License. Individuals or entities who have received
Derivative Works from You under this License, however, will not have their licenses terminated provided such individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those licenses. Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 and 11 will survive any termination of this License. b. If You bring a copyright, trademark, patent or any other infringement claim against any contributor over infringements You claim are made by the Work, your License from such contributor to the Work ends automatically. c. Subject to the above terms and conditions, this License is perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, the Author reserves the right to release the Work under different license terms or to stop distributing the
Work at any time; provided, however that any such election will not serve to withdraw this License (or any other license that has been, or is required to be, granted under the terms of this License), and this License will continue in full force and effect unless terminated as stated above.
10. Publisher. The parties hereby confirm that the Publisher shall not, under any circumstances, be responsible for and shall not have any liability in respect of the subject matter of this License. The
Publisher makes no warranty whatsoever in connection with the Work and shall not be liable to
You or any party on any legal theory for any damages whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special, incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this license. The
Publisher reserves the right to cease making the Work available to You at any time without notice
11. Miscellaneous a. This License shall be governed by the laws of the location of the head office of the
Author or if the Author is an individual, the laws of location of the principal place of residence of the Author. b. If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law, it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this License, and without further action by the parties to this License, such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable. c. No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and no breach consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in writing and signed by the party to be charged with such waiver or consent. d. This License constitutes the entire agreement between the parties with respect to the
Work licensed herein. There are no understandings, agreements or representations with respect to the Work not specified herein. The Author shall not be bound by any additional provisions that may appear in any communication from You. This License may not be modified without the mutual written agreement of the Author and You.
M
ISC
U
TIL
.
DLL
: M
ISC
U
TIL
"Miscellaneous Utility Library" Software Licence
Version 1.0
Copyright (c) 2004-2006 Jon Skeet. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
299
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following acknowledgment:
"This product includes software developed by Jon Skeet ([email protected], http://www.pobox.com/~skeet/)."
Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such thirdparty acknowledgments normally appear.
4. The name "Miscellaneous Utility Library" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact [email protected].
5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Miscellaneous Utility Library", nor may
"Miscellaneous Utility Library" appear in their name, without prior written permission of Jon
Skeet.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL JON SKEET BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
F
ACEBOOK
D
EVELOPMENT
P
LATFORM
J
AVA
C
LIENT
Copyright (c) 2007 Facebook, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
300
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
For help with this library, contact [email protected]
.
F
ACEBOOK
API L
ICENSE
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
S
OFTWARE
L
ICENSE
A
GREEMENT
(BSD L
ICENSE
)
Copyright (c) 2008, Meraka Institute
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
301
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
• Neither the name of the Meraka Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
P
ACKET
V
IDEO
FFmpeg License and Legal Considerations
FFmpeg License
FFmpeg is licensed under the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL) . However, FFmpeg incorporates several optional modules that are covered by the GNU General Public License (GPL) , notably libpostproc and libswscale. If those parts get used the GPL applies to all of FFmpeg. Read the license texts to learn how this affects programs built on top of FFmpeg or reusing FFmpeg.
You may also wish to have a look at the GPL FAQ .
Trademark
FFmpeg is a trademark of Fabrice Bellard, originator of the FFmpeg project.
Legal Mini-FAQ
A lot of legal questions arise when discussing multimedia technology. This mini-FAQ attempts to address these issues. Note that much of this discussion is based on precedent, or what has happened in the past under similar circumstances. Very little consideration is given to what could happen. If you use your imagination, you can visualize any dire scenario and cease doing any productive work.
Q: Does FFmpeg use patented algorithms?
A: We do not know, we are not lawyers so we are not qualified to answer this. Also we have never read patents to implement any part of FFmpeg, so even if we were qualified we could not answer it as we do not know what is patented. Furthermore the sheer number of software patents makes it impossible to read them all so no one (lawyer or not) could answer such a question with a definite no, those who do lie. What we do know is that various standards FFmpeg supports contain vague hints that any conforming implementation might be subject to some patent rights in some jurisdictions, examples for such statements are:
For H.264:
ITU draws attention to the possibility that the practice or implementation of this Recommendation may involve the use of a claimed Intellectual Property Right. ITU takes no position concerning the
302
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components evidence, validity or applicability of claimed Intellectual Property Rights, whether asserted by ITU members or others outside of the Recommendation development process.
And for MPEG-4:
The user's attention is called to the possibility that, for some of the processes specified in this part of
ISO/IEC 14496, conformance with this specification may require use of an invention covered by patent rights. By publication of this part of ISO/IEC 14496, no position is taken with respect to the validity of this claim or of any patent rights in connection therewith.
Q: Is it legal to use such patented algorithms?
A: Patent laws change wildly between jurisdictions. Besides, even in places where software patents are recognized, there is serious doubt about the legitimacy of such legislation. Note that patents on algorithms are illegal in many countries. Plus the use of patents to prevent the usage of a format or codec on a specific operating system or together with specific other software might violate antitrust laws.
Q: Bottom line: Should I be worried about legal issues if I use FFmpeg?
A: Are you a private user working with FFmpeg for your own personal purposes? If so, there is remarkably little reason to be concerned. Are you using FFmpeg in a commercial software product? Read on to the next question...
Q: Since FFmpeg is licensed under the LGPL, is it perfectly alright to incorporate the whole
FFmpeg core into my own commercial product?
A: You might have a problem here. Sure, the LGPL allows you to incorporate the code. However, there have been cases where companies have used FFmpeg in their projects, usually for such capabilities as superior MPEG-4 decoding. These companies found out that once you start trying to make money from certain technologies, the alleged owners of the technologies will come after their protection money. Most notably, MPEG-LA (licensing authority) is vigilant and diligent about collecting for MPEG-related technologies.
Q: You called the patent license fee protection money, is this a joke?
A: No. The legal validity of these patents is highly questionable. Still in many current legal systems it is very easy to ruin a company with patents even if the patents are invalid. Paying the
(small) license fee is much cheaper than a patent lawsuit during which you would not be able to sell your product as the patent would be valid until you win the lawsuit 5+ years in the future. That is assuming you did not go bankrupt in the meantime...
Q: Can I be safe if I have paid my protection money.
A: You can never be safe as long as your country recognizes software patents as valid. There are companies that own many patents, pay and cross-license for other companies patents, but even such companies are being found guilty of infringing some obscure little-known patent and end up paying millions for it. That's why lobbying against software patents is in your own interest. Of course none of this is related to you using FFmpeg or another codec implementation. If you want to be safe the only option is not to touch any software at all.
303
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Yahoo ASTRA Components for Flash: BSD License
Software License Agreement
The copyrights to the software code or designs (i.e., excluding any logos or trademarks or service marks of Yahoo! Inc.) written by Yahoo! are licensed under the following terms:
Copyright (c) 2008, Yahoo! Inc. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use of this software in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of Yahoo! Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission of Yahoo!
Inc.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This also code contains software from the following sources, and licensed under the following terms:
In Charts:
DynamicRegistration. Copyright (c) 2003 Darron Schall (according to author, based on Robert
Penner's (www.robertpenner.com) ActionScript 1 implementation); modified by Yahoo! Inc. for
ActionScript 3 implementation)
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
304
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components
3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
In Charts:
Modified version of mc.drawWedge prototype by Ric Ewing ([email protected]) - version 1.3 - 6.12.2002
• Thanks to: Robert Penner, Eric Mueller and Michael Hurwicz for their contributions.
• Source: http://www.adobe.com/devnet/flash/articles/adv_draw_methods.html
(code is "free to use as you see fit. They are free of charge or obligation. I have endeavored to make these methods robust and useful, however I can make no guarantees about their suitability to your specific needs.
I similarly make no guarantees that they are bug or problem free: caveat emptor.")
In Layout Utility and Layout Containers:
PercentageSizeUtil
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Adobe Systems Incorporated (see original files for appropriate copyright notices)
Contributor(s): Yahoo! Inc.
Mozilla Public License Version 1.1
1. Definitions.
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications.
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the
Modifications made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. "Covered Code"
305
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and
Modifications, in each case including portions thereof.
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code.
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice
.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License.
1.8. "License" means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is:
Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous
Modifications.
Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice
as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's
306
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge.
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms
of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1
"You" includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You.
For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.
2. Source Code License.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property claims: a. under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and b. under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof).
c. the licenses granted in this Section 2.1 ( a ) and ( b
) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the terms of this License.
d. Notwithstanding Section 2.1 ( b
) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license a. under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as
Covered Code and/or as part of a Larger Work; and b. under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that
Contributor either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1)
Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of
Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination).
c. the licenses granted in Sections 2.2 ( a
) and 2.2 (
) are effective on the date Contributor first makes
Commercial Use of the Covered Code.
d. Notwithstanding Section 2.2 ( b
) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that
Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version;
3) for infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the
307
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the
Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor.
3. Distribution Obligations.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this
License, including without limitation Section 2.2
. The Source Code version of Covered Code may
be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this License released under Section
, and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source
Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in
Section
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source
Code form under the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially became available, or at least six
(6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in (a) the Source
Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims
If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is
required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1
, Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is made available as
, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies
Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered
Code that new knowledge has been obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs
If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this information in the legal file.
308
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4 ( a ) above, Contributor
believes that Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License.
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to
put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s) You may add your name as a Contributor to
the notice described in Exhibit A . You must also duplicate this License in any documentation for
the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to Covered
Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by
You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Sections 3.1
,
have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section
notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code.
You may distribute the Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of
Your choice, which may contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the
Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer.
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code.
4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and
the code they affect. Such description must be included in the legal file described in Section 3.4
and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it.
309
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
5. Application of this License.
This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in
and to related Covered Code.
6. Versions of the License.
6.1. New Versions
Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of New Versions
Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this
License.
6.3. Derivative Works
If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in
shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.)
7. Disclaimer of warranty
Covered code is provided under this license on an "as is" basis, without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied, including, without limitation, warranties that the covered code is free of defects, merchantable, fit for a particular purpose or non-infringing. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the covered code is with you. Should any covered code prove defective in any respect, you (not the initial developer or any other contributor) assume the cost of any necessary servicing, repair or correction. This disclaimer of warranty constitutes an essential part of this license. No use of any covered code is
authorized hereunder except under this disclaimer.
8. Termination
8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred to as "Participant") alleging that: a. such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by such Participant to You under Sections
of this License shall, upon
60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of
310
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1
and/or 2.2
automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above. b. any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections
2.1(
made, Modifications made by that Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's
Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant under Sections
shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license.
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1
above, all end user license agreements
(excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination.
9. Limitation of liability
Under no circumstances and under no legal theory, whether tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, shall you, the initial developer, any other contributor, or any distributor of covered code, or any supplier of any of such parties, be liable to any person for any indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character including, without limitation, damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses, even if such party shall have been informed of the possibility of such damages.
This limitation of liability shall not apply to liability for death or personal injury resulting from such party's negligence to the extent applicable law prohibits such limitation. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so this exclusion and limitation may not apply to you.
10. U.S. government end users
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48
C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government
End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.
11. Miscellaneous
This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by California law provisions
(except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of
California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses.
The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods
311
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License.
12. Responsibility for claims
As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability.
13. Multiple-licensed code
Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-
Licensed" means that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the MPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in
Exhibit A - Mozilla Public License.
"The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the
License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the
License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License. The Original
Code is ______________________________________. The Initial Developer of the Original
Code is ________________________. Portions created by ______________________ are
Copyright (C) _____________________________. All Rights Reserved. Contributor(s):
______________________________________. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in which case the provisions of
[______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the [___]
License."NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the
Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.
PureMVC Framework: Creative Commons Attribution
License 3.0
To view the Creative Commons Attribution License terms please see http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/us/ .
ScaleFilter: Software License Agreement (BSD License)
Copyright (c) 2008, Meraka Institute
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
312
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of the Meraka Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Real-Time Video Coding
Contents
5.1 DirectShow Filter Downloads
Background
The objective of the Real-Time Video Coding group is to research and develop intelligent multimedia software components and delivery systems that adapt to congested and low infrastructure network environments. The emphasis is on jointly-optimised or co-operative behaviour between the delivery context, as in real-time network conditions, and the video/audio encoder rate control mechanisms. Innovative solutions are sought to enhance the Internet video experience in a developing world context where bandwidth is a scarce resource.
Current research within the group is concentrating on optimal and weighted context-based bit allocation techniques and implementations within international standard video codecs. A scalable and bandwidth adaptive multimedia broadcasting platform is under development to encompass the novelty of the bit allocation research.
313
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Contact Details
Contact Person: Dr Keith Ferguson
Tel: +27(0)12 841 4433
Fax: +27(0)12 841 4720
Email: kferguson[at]csir.co.za
Seminars
30 September 2007 - IEEE students seminar at UCT
13 March 2008 - Seminar at UKZN
14 May 2008 - Guest lecture on Video Coding at University of Pretoria
Papers
Papers will be available here once complete.
Downloads
A part of the objective of the Real-Time Video Coding group is to utilise open source frameworks and to contribute to the open source community as well as to provide source code that is available for general usage. Please send comments, feedback, suggestions to rtvc[at]meraka.org.za.
DirectShow Filter Downloads
The following DirectShow filters are available for download as DLLs. These need to be registered using the regsvr32 command. Download the documentation below for more information about the filters.
Filter
ScaleFilter
CropFilter
Version v1.1 v1.3
Description
The ScaleFilter is a DirectShow filter that can scale
RGB24 media to specified target dimensions.
The CropFilter is a DirectShow filter that can crop
RGB24 and RGB32 media.
RGBtoYUV420Filter
YUV420toRGBFilter v1.0 v1.0
This filter converts RGB24 or RGB32 media to a
YUV4:2:0 Planar format whilst retaining the original VideoInfoHeader of the media.
This filter converts the custom packed YUV420 planar format back to RGB24.
Source Downloads
• Base classes and interfaces - DirectShow base classes and interfaces have been written which simplify the creation of a transform filter. The CCustomBaseFilter class provides a base class for filters with a single input and output pin. The MultiIOBaseFilter project provides support for writing DirectShow transform filters with multiple input and output pins such as multiplexers and
314
Licenses, Copyrights and Notices for Open Source Components demultiplexers. All Meraka RTVC filters inherit these base classes, which are available in the download. The base class have been compiled into a static library which the user can reference in the project.
• Filter Source Code - The download also contains the source code for the above-mentioned scaling, cropping and color conversion filters.
• Image Utilities - The ImageUtils folder contains source code for various image processing such as cropping, scaling, etc. These files have been compiled into a static library which is also referenced by filters that require such functionality.
• DirectShow LiveMedia RTSP Live Audio Streaming Server - This project provides an example as to how the DirectShow framework can be integrated with a RTP/RTCP/RTSP streaming library in order to stream live audio.
Source Code v1.3
Documentation
Links
• DirectShow related
•
Blog containing free DirectShow filters and GraphStudio , which offers some improved functionality over GraphEdit
•
DirectShow training
• RTP/RTCP/RTSP related
•
Open source RTP/RTCP/RTSP library that covers framing, sending of many media formats with a high level of importance based on standards. Main support via mailing list.
Media
•
CSIR researcher profile series : Streamlining delivery of internet video broadcasting
•
DST-Innovation Fund investment boosts collaborative research on real-time video broadcasting project
•
Innovation Fund investment boosts collaborative research on real-time video broadcasting project
315
Glossary
A
all-in-one-gateway: A device that provides multiple network features such as a router, modem, local area network (LAN) switch, firewall, and/or a wireless access point. Also see LAN.
anti-virus software: Software that checks a hard drive for viruses (harmful computer code) that may infect a computer.
B
BIOS: Basic Input/Output Services—the firmware code run by the HP MediaSmart Server when first powered on. The BIOS prepares the server for operation and allows the server software to load, execute, and assume control of the server. This process is also known as booting up.
Browser window: A browser window is used to display web pages either on a web site or stored locally such as the HP MediaSmart Server’s User’s Guide.
C
client computers: A client computer is a computer that accesses the HP MediaSmart Server by the home network. This term also applies to computers using remote access to the server.
D
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol—the protocol used to assign IP addresses to network devices, such as computers. DHCP automatically assigns IP addresses to network devices; the assigned address can change over time. Also see IP address, Protocol, and Static IP Address.
Digital Living Network Alliance: A set of standards (that includes UPnP A/V) for sharing media between devices. PVConnect is DLNA compliant. Windows Media Connect is not. This compliance allows
PVConnect to work with more DMRs.
digital rights management: Technology built into digital media, such as music and movies, that allows companies in charge of their copyrights to decide how and where media can be used.
DMR: Digital Media Receiver (DMR), Digital Media Adapter (DMA), Digital Media Player (DMP)—a consumer electronic device that communicates with the HP MediaSmart Server and brings digital media streams—such as photos, music, or video—to your entertainment center.
DNS: Domain Name System—a server that associates network names with IP addresses. Also see IP address.
F
folder duplication: Folder duplication duplicates folders and files across multiple hard drives. If you enable folder duplication and one hard drive fails, you will not lose any files stored in a shared folder. Any folder that has folder duplication enabled uses twice the amount of server storage.
H
317
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
HTTPS: A secure HTTP connection. HTTP (HyperText Transfer Protocol) is the format used to transfer and send web page information across networks, on the Internet, and in help systems. HTTPS is an
HTTP connection over encrypted Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) transport mechanism. Also see
Protocol.
I
IP address: An IP (Internet Protocol) address is a number that uniquely identifies devices, such as computers, on a network.
L
LAN: Local area network—a small number of computers that are connected together in a small area, usually in the same building.
logical: A device, such as a partition named by the logic of a software system, regardless of its physical relationship to the system. For example, a computer with a single physical hard disk that contains two logical drives, C: and D:. Another example is an HP Media Vault with two hard drives that contains a single logical volume spanning both drives.
M
Map: Assigning a drive letter to the connection on a computer to access a shared folder on the server.
Mbps: Megabits per second.
Media streaming: Media streaming sends media—music, photos and video files—from the HP
MediaSmart Server to other devices that can play the media. The HP MediaSmart Server includes functionality that allows media to stream to a Digital Media Adapter (DMA). Also see DMR.
N
NAT: Network Address Translation—Broadband routers use NAT technology to allow network components to share Internet access over a single IP address. Additionally, NAT acts like a firewall because the computers and other devices—including the HP MediaSmart Server—on the network are given IP address that are non-routable (non-internet addresses). This masks the real IP addresses of your network components and keeps them from being seen outside the home. Also see IP address.
P
partition: A logical division of a physical hard disk. Partition data refers to the information contained within the divisions on the drive. For example, some computers are formatted with a C: and D: drive, both of which use the same physical hard drive.
password hint: A password hint helps you remember your password. The password hint can be seen by anybody who clicks the link to display it.
physical hard disk: The actual hard disk (hard drive) located in a device that stores files and data.
port 80: Usually, an HTTP client, such as a Web browser, initiates contact to a server, such as the HP
MediaSmart Server, through port 80. After contacting the server, the server sends back a response, such as a Photo Webshare page.
Privilege level: A level assigned by the user that decides what access levels are available to other users.
Protocol: The standard(s) of how computers communicate data with each other.
318
Glossary
R
router: A device connected to your computer that joins two or more networks. For example, a router connects your local network to the internet.
S
SATA: Serial Advanced Technology Attachment (or Serial ATA) is an interface standard that moves information to and from a storage device, such as a hard drive.
shared folders: A “share folder” means the same as a “share,” and you can use these terms interchangeably: A shared folder is a top-level folder that is shared on the network and stores other folders within it. For example, the Music shared folder can store other folders (called sub-folders).
A subfolder might be named for a musician, such as Mark Knopfler.
SMTP: Simple Mail Transfer Protocol—The main protocol used to send email on the Internet, consisting of rules for how programs sending mail should interact with programs receiving mail.
Static IP Address: A number assigned to a device, such as a computer, on a network to be its permanent
IP address. Also see IP address and DHCP.
strong password: A strong password must be at least 7 characters long and must fulfill three of the following four character criteria: uppercase characters, lowercase characters, numbers, and symbols (such as !, @, #, and so on.) Also see password hint.
Sub-folders: A folder within a folder or a shared folder.
Subnet Mask: Identifies the portion of the network IP address that can be used for subnetworks. Also see
IP address.
System drive: The hard drive (or drive partition) containing the operating system.
T
TB: Terabyte—refers to a data storage capacity equal to approximately 1000 gigabytes.
TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A set of communications protocols used to transmit data over networks. TCP provides for the establishment of connections and exchanges streams of data. IP specifies the format of the data. Also see IP address.
TCP/IPv4: TCP/IPv4 is the standard TCP/IP protocol in use today.
TCP/IPv6: TCP/IPv6 is the standard TCP/IP protocol used by Windows Vista. IPv6 main advantage is the increase in number of available addresses.
U
UNC: Uniform Naming Convention—identifies shared network devices, such as the HP MediaSmart
Server. It is a format for specifying the location of resources on a local-area network (LAN). It identifies each shared resource with a unique address in the following format: \\servername\sharedfolder-name. For example, \\SERVER\software. Also see LAN.
UPnP: Universal Plug and Play—a networking protocol that allows for many different types of devices to interact with one another. UPnP is the protocol used by media streaming.
V
Visitor: HP Photo Webshare albums can be shared with people outside your local network, called visitors.
If you use the HP MediaSmart Server for personal use, visitors may be family or friends such as
319
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Grandma or Aunt Karen. If you use the Server for business, visitors may be your customers or business partners.
W
WAP: Wireless Access Point—a device, such as a wireless router, that connects wireless communication devices together to form a wireless network. A WAP often connects to a wired network, and can relay data between wireless devices and wired devices.
Web browser: An application used to access information on networks, on the internet, and in help systems.
Common web browsers include Internet Explorer, Netscape, and Firefox.
Webshare Manager: A type of user account that is enabled with Webshare Manager permissions.
Webshare Managers have access to all HP Photo Webshare features, including viewing and managing content in all albums, sharing albums with people outside the home network, and approving album content added by people that share the album.
WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy—a protocol that encrypts data on a wireless system for security.
WPA: Wi-Fi Protected Access—a technology that allows for increased security with wireless networks.
320
Index
3
A
About Hardware Warning Messages
About HP Add-ins
207
70, 83
Apache License 278
Audio 189
189
22
AV 155
Available Port 223
HP MediaSmart Server
Account Setup
Internal SATA Drive
Additional Computers
Administrative Privileges
Album Missing Photos
Amazon S3 existing account get account
43, 85
143
235
37
9, 22
115
HP MediaSmart Server 131
Backup Disk Size
Backup Disk Status
Before Media Collector
Browse button
131
131
206
157
98, 113, 152, 189
123
43, 85
67, 143
143
143
301, 312
Bucket 143
C
321
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
181, 182
Choose Backup Disk
Client computer
Computer Recovery
Computer Requirements
Computers & Backup
131
43, 85
230
263
71, 90
Create 131
Mac Folder
Create Account
131
77
D
Defaults 157
Configure
Time Machine
43, 85, 131
131
Digital Media Adapter
189, 212, 253
155
90, 152, 177, 178, 182,
Configure HP Media Collector General Settings
Configure HP MediaSmart Software Update 43,
85
152, 212, 253
Digital Media Receiver 147, 152, 212, 253, 255
Configure Mac Client 131
Digital Media Server
DIVX
147, 148, 152, 155
152, 157, 178, 179
Configure Media Collector 147, 161, 164, 167
Music 164
DMA 7, 90, 152, 177, 178, 182, 189, 195, 212,
Configure PVConnect 155, 189 DMR 7, 70, 83, 90, 152, 155, 177, 178, 182, 189,
195, 212, 253
Streaming Media 155
Domain Name System 223
Configure Remote Access 189
Download Firefox
Configuring Windows Update 45
Download Internet Explorer
Connect 8
Download iTunes
HP MediaSmart Server 8
Download Safari
Connect As 123
4
4
4
4
DRM 177,
Contact 11
179
Duplicate Songs firewall 11
259, 260
DV 189
Control Center 57, 59, 129
Control Center application 131
322
Index
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
E
Electrical Ratings
7
263
Gif
Guest Account
98, 113, 152, 157, 189
179, 214
Ethernet switch
External USB Drive
F
Facebook License
Facebook Logon
Factory Reset
FFmpeg License
Firefly License
223
241
277, 300, 301
104
231
302
288
Hardware Status
Hardware Tab
Health Indicator Codes
Help systems
Home network
Home PC
Home Server Connector Software
Home Server Console
206, 207
207
89
210
88
189
43, 85
147
37
67
Firefox 2.0
Firewall
263
9, 11, 225, 253
HP Media Collector
HP Media Collector Default Settings
67, 157
157
157 using 11, 5, 7, 11, 37, 43, 67, 85,
89, 147, 148, 152, 157, 189, 212, 225
Firewall Blocking Messages Mean 220
First Backup 226
Connect 7
FLAC 152
Install 37
Flickr Login Page 101
FlickrJ License 277
FLV 157
HP MediaSmart Server Control Center
Folders View 195, 199
HP MediaSmart Server Requirements
Format 199
HP MediaSmart Server Settings
Format Compatibility 189
HP MediaSmart Server Software Installation
Full Resolution 177, 178, 179
131
189
89
323
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
HP MediaSmart Server Software Update 43, 85
HP Photo Publisher 67, 95
HP Photo Publisher Home
HP Photo Publisher Log on Page
93
95
HP Photo Viewer
HP Photo Viewer Slideshow
HP Software
67
108
43, 85
HP Software Update Install Wizard
HP Software Version
43, 85
89
HP Update 37, 45, 53, 121, 175
HP Web Streamer application 148
I
Internal SATA Drive 238
Removing 238
Internet Explorer
Internet Explorer 6.0
234
263
Internet Protocol
IP 7
IPhone application
7
177
IPods 177
ITunes 22, 67, 148, 149, 157, 164, 249 running 67
Settings 149
Ignored Directories 157
In the Box
Install Flash
3
189
Install HP MediaSmart Server Mac Client 131
Install Mac OS
Install Wizard
131
22
Installing 11, 22, 37, 39, 43, 85, 117, 225
Additional Computers 37
ITunes Frequently Asked Questions 248
JCIFS 281
Jpg
L
Launch Time Machine
98, 113, 152, 157, 189
131
LC 189
Learn 11
Lights 3
First Computer
HP MediaSmart Server
Mac Features
Mac Software
Windows Home Server Connector
22
11, 22, 37, 225
22
39, 117
22
Locating 11
HP MediaSmart Server 11
Log 189
LPCM 152
324
M MediaSmart Photo Viewer
Index
98, 113
226
43, 85
Mac Backup
Mac Client Version Number
Mac Features
Mac Folder
131
53, 121
22, 67
131
Mobile Resolution
179
177, 178, 179
Mp1 152
Manage Network Connections
Manually Check
222
43, 85
Mpa 152
Mpe 152
Manually Install
Update Copied
McAfee SecurityCenter
Media
43, 85
43, 85
70, 83
70, 83, 212
MPEG-1 152
MPEG-2 152
MPEG-2-T-S 152
Media Collection
Media Collection Order
157
157
Mpg 189
Mpg/mpeg 152
Media Collector67, 147, 157, 164, 168, 170, 173,
175, 179
Music 164
Media Collector General 159
Configure Media Collector
Media Collector Status Tool 170, 175
Music Collection Status
Media Sharing 212, 253, 260
Music Duplication
Media Smart Server 226
Music Formats
Media streaming 177, 182, 195, 253
Music Organization
Media Types 147
Music Source
Streaming 147
164
164
157
152
164
164
325
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
N
HP MediaSmart Server
NET 2.0
22
22
P
PC Client Version
PC Restore Disc
22, 77
37
230
Network Connection Issues 214
Network Connection Light Blinking Aqua White
No Server Found 209
Pct 157
Photo Caption 108
Photo Publisher
Network Connection Light Off 211, 219
Photo Viewer
Network Health 219
Photo Viewer Home Page
Network Health Light 11, 214
Photos
Network NetBIOS Properties 222
Photos Uploading
Check 222
98, 101, 113
115
107
70, 83, 195
100
Network Places 82
Picasa Logon 105
Add Shared Folders 82
Picture Formats 152
Network Requirements 6, 263
Pictures 157
Networks 189
Pla 152
New Additions 248
Player 199
Playlist 248
Playlist Formats 152
Playlists 157
O
Png 98, 113, 152, 189
Obtain DNS server address 221
Ogg 152
Power 84
Online Backup 67, 144, 145
Podcasts 248
Power Consumption 263
Online Support 89
Links 89
Power-On Indicator
Optimum Data Throughput Speeds 224
Power Management
Product Specifications
84
206
263
Organization Options 157
Progress bar 199
Output Services 89
PureMVC 312
326
Index
PVConnect 67, 70, 83, 148, 151, 152, 155
PVConnect Default Settings 154
PVConnect Features
PVConnect File Formats
R
152, 255
255
Recovery fails
Regulatory Statements
Remote Access
Remote Management
Remote Streaming
Remote video
209, 233
267
4, 67, 90, 177
67
155
179
External USB Drive
Removing Drives
System Drive
Rollback
HP Software Click
Rolling Back Mac Clients
241
240
242
43, 85, 175
43, 85
53, 121
Browse button
Search button
Select file
Serial ATA
Serial Number
43, 85
43, 85
43, 85
98, 113
263
89
Server 89
Server 7, 43, 85, 157
Connecting 7
Server Lights
248
9
Checking 9
213
Server Location 5
214
212
137 Server Online Backup
Server Online Backup Dashboard
Server Password
137
22
S
Search button 43, 85
226, 231
Server Recovery Disc 226, 231
89
90, 235, 240
Expanding 235
207
327
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Settings 43, 85, 149, 212
Share folder
Shared Folders on Server
71, 90, 214
71
Skipped Files
Sleep Now button
Sleep Time
Slideshow View
157
84
84
108
Supported File Formats 157, 255
6, 263
77 System Preferences
T
296
TCP/IP 221
TCP/IPv4 221
Television 147
170
131
Snapfish Logon
Software firewalls
Software Installation Disc
Song Selection
Static IP Address
Status Information
Streaming 7, 147, 148, 151, 152, 189
Digital Media Adapter
100
11, 225
9, 22, 234 dedicated 131
Time Machine System Preferences 131
Total Protection Service 70, 83
Transfer Failure 209 248
7
170 Types 152
U
7, 152, 189
Media Requirements
Media Servers
Streaming Media
Support Tab
328
147
151
147
89
Uninterruptible Power Supply
226
226
Universal Plug 155
Unresponsive 205
Update Client Computers 43, 85
Update Copied
Manually Install
Updating
Manually Check
43, 85
43, 85
11, 43, 85, 225, 248
Microsoft Windows Home Server
43, 85
43, 85
Windows Home Server 43, 85
Your Firewall's Trusted Program List 11, 225
Index
Video Conversion
Fails 186
Video Converter 177, 178, 179, 184
189
Video files
Video Formats
Video streaming
70, 83
152, 189
177
177
271
HP MediaSmart
Use Time Machine
43, 85
67
Windows Client
Windows Firewall
199
7, 78
22
78
43, 85, 157 access information
User account
189
74, 77, 90, 123, 179, 181 Windows Home Server Connector 22, 78
User's Guide 90 Windows Home Server Connector Setup window 22
V loaded 22
Vdr 152
Windows Home Server Console 1, 43, 61, 85,
Version Numbers
Video codec
Video Collection Status
37, 53, 121, 175
177, 179
167
Opening 61
Windows Home Server Console Help 43, 85, 206
Windows Home Server Settings window
167
164,
329
HP MediaSmart Server User's Guide
Windows Home Server Tabs
Windows Homer Server
69
189
Windows Media Connect 70, 83, 152, 155, 255,
260
Windows Media Connect File Compatibility 152
Windows Media Player 164
Windows Server Console
Wired Equivalent Privacy
157
7
Wireless Network Connection
Wireless Support
221, 263
7
WM-DRM 10 Licensed Technology 270
X
Xbox 360 7
Y
Yahoo ASTRA Components
Your Firewall's Trusted Program List
304
11
330
Download
Anúncio